Netgear ‎GSM4328S-100NES 24-Port Fully Managed Switch User Manual

350 East Plumeria Drive

San Jose, CA 95134

USA

July 2016

202-11587-02

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE

Managed Switches

User Manual

Software Version 12.0.2

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Support

Thank you for purchasing this NETGEAR product. You can visit www.netgear.com/support to register your product, get help,

access the latest downloads and user manuals, and join our community. We recommend that you use only official NETGEAR

support resources.

Contact your Internet service provider for technical support.

Conformity

For the current EU Declaration of Conformity, visit http://kb.netgear.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/11621.

Compliance

For regulatory compliance information, visit http://www.netgear.com/about/regulatory.

See the regulatory compliance document before connecting the power supply.

Trademarks

used for reference purposes only.

Revision History

Publication Part Number Publish Date Comments

202-11587-02 July 2016 Made the following changes and additions:

• Changed the subnet over which you can access the

Ethernet network port to 169.254.0.0/16.

• Changed the subnet over which you can reach the

out-of-band (OOB) port to 192.168.0.0/16 and changed the

default IP address of the OOB port to 192.168.0.239.

• Added Loop Protection.

• Changed the procedures in Upload or Export a File From

the Switch.

• Changed the procedures in Download or Import a File to the

Switch.

202-11587-01 December 2015 First publication.

Contents

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Release Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Available Publications and Online Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Understanding the User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Web Management Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Software Requirements for Using the Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Use a Web Browser to Access the Switch and Log In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Web Interface Buttons and User-Defined Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Interface Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Online Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Web Management Interface Device View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Using SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Chapter 2 Configure System Information

Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Configure the Initial IPv4 Management VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Configure the Initial IPv6 Management VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Configure the Initial Service Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

View or Define System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

View the Fan Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

View the Temperature Sensor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

View the Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

View the System CPU Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Configure the CPU Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

View and Clear Switch Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

View USB Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

View Slot Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Configure a Loopback Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Configure Management Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Management VLAN Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Configure the Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Configure the SNTP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

View SNTP Global Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Configure an SNTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

View the DayLight Saving Time Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Configure DNS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Global DNS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Add a Static Entry to the Local DNS Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Configure the Switch Database Management Template Preference . . . . . . . . . 73

Configure Green Ethernet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Configure Green Ethernet Local and Remote Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Configure Green Ethernet Remote Device Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

View the Green Ethernet Statistics Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Configure the Green Ethernet EEE LPI History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Configure DHCP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Configure DHCP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Configure the DHCP Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Configure DHCP Pool Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

View DHCP Server Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

View DHCP Bindings Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

View DHCP Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Configure the DHCP Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

DHCP L2 Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Configure Global DHCP L2 Relay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Configure a DHCP L2 Relay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

View DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Configure UDP Relay Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Configure UDP Relay Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Manage the DHCPv6 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Enable or Disable the DHCPv6 Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Configure the DHCPv6 Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Configure the DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Configure DHCPv6 Interface Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

View DHCPv6 Bindings Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

View DHCPv6 Server Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Configure DHCPv6 Relay for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Configure PoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Configure Basic PoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Configure PoE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Configure PoE Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Configure SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Configure the SNMP V1/V2 Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

View the Supported MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Configure SNMP V3 Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Configure LLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Configure LLDP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Configure the LLDP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

View LLDP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

View LLDP Local Device Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

View LLDP Remote Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

View LLDP Remote Device Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure LLDP-MED Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Configure LLDP-MED Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

View LLDP-MED Local Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

View LLDP-MED Remote Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

View LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Configure Link Dependency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Configure Link Dependency Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Configure a Link Dependency Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Configure ISDP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Configure ISDP Basic Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Configure ISDP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Configure an ISDP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

View an ISDP Neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

View ISDP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Configure the Global Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Configure the Timer Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Chapter 3 Stacking

M4300 Series Switch Stacking Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Firmware Synchronization and Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Stack Configuration Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Stack Master Election . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Stack Factory Defaults Reset Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Stack NSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Configure a Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Select a New Stack Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Specify the Stack Sample Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Configure a Stack Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Change the Settings for an Existing Stack Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Configure the Mode of the Stack Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Run Stack Port Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Configure Stack Firmware Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

View NSF Summary Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

View NSF Checkpoint Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Chapter 4 Configure Switching Information

Configure VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Configure Basic VLAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Reset the VLAN Configuration to Default Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Configure an Internal VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Configure VLAN Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Configure VLAN Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

View VLAN Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Configure Port PVID Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Configure a MAC-Based VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Configure an IP Subnet-Based VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Configure a Port DVLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Configure a Voice VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Configure GARP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Configure GARP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Auto-VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

OUI-Based Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Add a New Entry to the OUI Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Delete Entries From the OUI Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

View the Auto-VoIP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

iSCSI Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Configure Global iSCSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

View iSCSI Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Control iSCSI Target Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

View iSCSI Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

View iSCSI Session Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Spanning Tree Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Configure Basic STP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Configure Advanced STP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Configure CST Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Configure CST Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

View CST Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Configure MST Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

View the Spanning Tree MST Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

View STP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Configure PVST VLAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Configure the PVST Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

View PVST Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Multicast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

View the MFDB Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

View the MFDB Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Configure IGMP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Configure a Multicast Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Configure a Multicast Router VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

IGMP Snooping Querier Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Configure MLD Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Configure a MLD Snooping Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Configure MLD VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Enable or Disable a Multicast Router on an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Configure Multicast Router VLAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure MLD Snooping Querier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Configure MVR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Configure Basic MVR Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Configure Advanced MVR Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Configure an MVR Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Configure an MVR Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Configure MVR Group Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

View MVR Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Search the MAC Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Configure a Static MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Configure Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Configure Port Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

View Port Transceiver Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Link Aggregation Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Configure LAG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Configure LAG Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Multiple Registration Protocol Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Configure Global MRP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Configure MRP Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

View MMRP and Clear Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

View and Clear MVRP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Loop Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

About Loop Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Loop Protection and PDU Packet Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Loop Protection and Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Configure the Global Loop Protection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Configure the Loop Protection Settings for Ports and View the

Loop Protection State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Chapter 5 Routing

Manage Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Configure a Basic Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Configure Advanced Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Specify Route Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Configure the Routing IP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

View Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Configure Routing Parameters for the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

View IP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Configure the IP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Configure the Secondary IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Configure IPv6 Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

View the IPv6 Route Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Configure IPv6 Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

IPv6 Prefix Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

View IPv6 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

View the IPv6 Neighbor Table and Clear IPv6 Neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

IPv6 Static Route Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

View the IPv6 Route Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

IPv6 Route Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Configure IPv6 Tunnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

VLAN Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Configure VLAN Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Configure Address Resolution Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Display the ARP Entries in the ARP Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Add an Entry to the ARP Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

View or Configure the ARP Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Configure RIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Enable RIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Configure RIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Configure Advanced RIP Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Route Redistribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Configure Router Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Configure Global VRRP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Configure Advanced VRRP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Configure an Advanced VRRP Secondary IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Configure an Advanced VRRP Tracking Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

View Advanced VRRP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Chapter 6 OSPF and OSPFv3

Configure OSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Configure Basic OSPF Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Configure the OSPF Default Route Advertise Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Configure OSPF Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Configure the OSPF Common Area ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Configure the OSPF Stub Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Configure the OSPF NSSA Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Configure the OSPF Area Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Configure the OSPF Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

View and Clear OSPF Statistics for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

View and the OSPF Neighbor Table and Clear OSPF Neighbors. . . . . . . . . . 358

View the OSPF Link State Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

Configure the OSPF Virtual Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Configure the OSPF Route Redistribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

View the NSF OSPF Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Configure OSPFv3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Configure Basic OSPFv3 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Configure OSPFv3 Default Route Advertise Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Configure the Advanced OSPFv3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure the OSPFv3 Common Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Configure an OSPFv3 Stub Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Configure the OSPFv3 NSSA Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Configure the OSPFv3 Area Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

Configure the OSPFv3 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

View and Clear OSPFv3 Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

View the OSPFv3 Neighbor Table and Clear OSPFv3 Neighbors. . . . . . . . . 388

View the OSPFv3 Link State Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Configure the OSPFv3 Virtual Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Configure OSPFv3 Route Redistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

View the NSF OSPFv3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Chapter 7 Multicast Routing

Multicast Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

View the Multicast Mroute Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Configure Global Multicast Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Configure the Multicast Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

Configure Global Multicast DVMRP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Configure the DVMRP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Search for DVMRP Neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

View the DVMRP Next Hop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

View the Multicast DVMRP Prune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

View the DVMRP Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Configure Multicast IGMP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Configure IGMP Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Configure the IGMP Routing Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

View IGMP Routing Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

View IGMP Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

View the IGMP Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Configure the IGMP Proxy Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

View the IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

View the IGMP Proxy Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

Configure PIM Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Configure the Multicast PIM Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Configure PIM SSM Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Configure PIM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

View the PIM Neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

View the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

View the PIM Neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Configure the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

Configure the PIM Bootstrap Router Candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Configure the PIM Static Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Configure Multicast Static Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Configure the Multicast Admin Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Configure IPv6 Multicast Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

View the IPv6 Multicast Mroute Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Configure the IPv6 PIM Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Configure IPv6 PIM SSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure the IPv6 PIM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

View the IPv6 PIM Neighbor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Configure the IPv6 PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Configure the IPv6 PIM Bootstrap Router Candidate Settings . . . . . . . . . . 438

Configure the IPv6 PIM Static Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Configure IPv6 MLD Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Configure the IPv6 MLD Routing Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

View IPv6 MLD Routing Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

View the IPv6 MLD Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

View and Clear IPv6 MLD Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Configure the IPv6 MLD Proxy Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

View IPv6 MLD Proxy Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

View the IPv6 MLD Proxy Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Configure IPv6 Multicast Static Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Chapter 8 Configure Quality of Service

QoS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Configure Global CoS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Map 802.1p Priorities to Queues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Map DSCP Values to Queues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Configure CoS Drop Precedence Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Differentiated Services Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

DiffServ Wizard Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Use the DiffServ Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Configure Basic DiffServ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Configure the Global DiffServ Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

Configure a DiffServ Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Configure DiffServ IPv6 Class Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Configure DiffServ Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Configure the DiffServ Service Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

View DiffServ Service Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

Chapter 9 Manage Device Security

Manage User Accounts and Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Configure User Accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Configure a User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Enable Password Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Configure a Line Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Manage the RADIUS Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Configure Global RADIUS Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Configure a RADIUS Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Configure RADIUS Accounting Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Manage the TACACS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Global TACACS Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Configure TACACS Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Configure Authentication Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Configure a Login Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Configure an Enable Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

Configure the Dot1x Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Configure an HTTP Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Configure an HTTPS Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502

View Login Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503

Manage HHTP, HTTPS, and SSH Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Configure HTTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

HTTPS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

Manage Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Download Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Configure SSH Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Manage Host Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Download Host Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Configure Telnet Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Configure a Telnet Authentication List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Configure Inbound Telnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Configure Outbound Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Configure Console Port Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

Configure Denial of Service Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Configure Access Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Configure an Access Control Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Configure Access Rule Settings for the Access Control Profile . . . . . . . . . . 525

Manage Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Configure Global 802.1X Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

Configure 802.1X Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

Configure Port Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

View the Port Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

View the Client Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

Control Traffic With MAC Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Configure MAC Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

MAC Filter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Configure Port Security and Private Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

Configure the Global Port Security Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

Configure a Port Security Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Convert Learned MAC Addresses to Static Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540

Configure Static MAC Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Configure Private Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Configure Private Group Membership. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Protect Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Set Up Private VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Configure a Private VLAN Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Configure Private VLAN Association Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

Configure the Private VLAN Port Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Configure a Private VLAN Host Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure a Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

Manage the Storm Control Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Configure Global Storm Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Configure Storm Control for a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

Configure DHCP Snooping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Configure DHCP Snooping Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Configure a DHCP Snooping Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Configure a Static DHCP Snooping Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

View the Dynamic DHCP Snooping Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Configure Snooping Persistent Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

View and Clear the DHCP Snooping Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Configure IP Source Guard Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

Configure IP Source Guard Binding Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

Configure IPv6 Source Guard Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Configure an IPv6 Source Guard Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Configure Dynamic ARP Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Configure the Global Dynamic ARP inspection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Configure DAI VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

Configure DAI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

Configure a DAI ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

Configure a DAI ACL Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

View DAI Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

Set Up Captive Portals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Configure Captive Portal Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Add a Captive Portal Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Configure Captive Portals Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

View the Captive Portal Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Configure a Captive Portal Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Configure Captive Portal User Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

Configure the Captive Portal Trap Flag Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

View and Clear the Captive Portal Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Set Up and Manage Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Use the ACL Wizard to Create a Simple ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Configure an ACL Based on Destination MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

Use the ACL Wizard to Complete the Destination MAC ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Configure a Basic MAC ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Configure MAC ACL Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

Configure MAC Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

View and Delete MAC ACL Bindings in the MAC Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . 593

Configure an IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Configure Rules for an IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

Configure Rules for an Extended IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

Configure an IPv6 ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Configure IPv6 Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Configure IP ACL Interface Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

View and Delete IP ACL Bindings in the IP ACL Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . . 612

Configure VLAN ACL Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Chapter 10 Monitor the System

View Port and EAP Packet Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

View and Clear Port Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

View and Clear the Detailed Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

View EAP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624

Perform a Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

Manage the Buffered, Command, and Console Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

View and Clear the Buffered Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

Configure the Buffered Log Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

Message Log Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

Enable or Disable the Command Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

Enable or Disable Console Logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

Configure the Syslog and Syslog Host Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

Configure the Syslog Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

Configure the Syslog Host Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

View and Clear the Trap Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

View and Clear the Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Configure Multiple Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

Globally Configure Multiple Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636

Configure The Port Mirroring Source Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

Manage an RSPAN VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Configure an RSPAN VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Configure an RSPAN Source Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

Configure an RSPAN Source Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

Configure the RSPAN Destination Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

Configure sFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

sFlow Agent Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Configure Basic sFlow Agent Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Configure sFlow Agent Advanced Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

Configure an sFlow Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

Configure the sFlow Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

Chapter 11 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Save the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Configure Auto Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Reset the Switch to Its Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

Reset All User Passwords to Their Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

Upload or Export a File From the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Upload a File to the TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

HTTP File Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

Upload a File from the Switch to a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Download or Import a File to the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Download a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Download a File to the Switch Using HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

Download a File from a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

Copy an Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Dual Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

Ping IPv4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

Ping IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

Traceroute IPv4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Traceroute IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

Packet Capturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

Perform a Full Memory Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Appendix A Default Settings

Appendix B Configuration Examples

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

VLAN Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

Access Control Lists (ACLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

MAC ACL Sample Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

Standard IP ACL Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

Differentiated Services (DiffServ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

DiffServ Traffic Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Creating Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

DiffServ Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

802.1X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

802.1X Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

MSTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

MSTP Example Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693

Appendix C Acronyms and Abbreviations

1. Getting Started

This chapter provides an overview of how you can using your switch and access the web

management user interface.

The chapter contains the following sections:

• Release Overview

• Available Publications and Online Help

• Register Your Product

• Understanding the User Interfaces

• Web Management Interface Overview

• Use a Web Browser to Access the Switch and Log In

• Using SNMP

Note: For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the

support website at netgear.com/support.

Note: Firmware updates with new features and bug fixes are made

available from time to time at downloadcenter.netgear.com. Some

products can regularly check the site and download new firmware, or

you can check for and download new firmware manually. If the

features or behavior of your product does not match what is

described in this guide, you might need to update your firmware.

Getting Started

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Release Overview

The NETGEAR Prosafe Managed software version 12.0.2 is for the M4200 and M4300

Series ProSAFE Managed Switches with 10G uplinks.

These switches introduce the following new features:

• Support for link dependency

The link dependency feature lets you enable or disable one or more ports based on the

link state of one or more different ports. With link dependency enabled on a port, the link

state of that port depends on the link state of another port. For example, if port A depends

on port B and the switch detects a link loss on port B, the switch automatically brings

down the link on port A. When the link is restored to port B, the switch automatically

restores the link to port A. For more information, see Configure Link Dependency on

page 139.

• Capability to send syslog messages can be sent to a to a USB flash storage drive. For

more information, see Configure the Syslog Settings on page 631.

• Capability to send packets that are mirrored from the CPU to a USB flash storage drive.

For more information, see Packet Capturing on page 673.

• Support for an out-of-band (OOB) port.

Available Publications and Online Help

A number of publications are available at downloadcenter.netgear.com, including the

following publication:

• The installation guide for your switch:

- Installation NETGEAR ProSAFE Managed Switches, M4200 Series

- Installation NETGEAR ProSAFE Managed Switches, M4300 Series

• The hardware installation guide for your switch:

- ProSAFE Managed Switch Series M4200 Hardware Installation Guide

• M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Software Setup Manual

• M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches CLI Command Reference

Manual

• M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Software Administration Manual

• M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches User Manual (this document).

You can also access this document online when you are logged in to the switch. Select

Help > Online Help > User Guide.

When you log into the web management interface, online help is available. See Online Help

on page 20.

Getting Started

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The first time you log in to the switch, you are given the option of registering with NETGEAR.

Registration confirms that your e-mail alerts work, lowers technical support resolution time,

and ensures that your shipping address accuracy. NETGEAR would also like to incorporate

your feedback into future product development. NETGEAR never sells or rents your e-mail

address and you can opt out of communications at any time.

To register with NETGEAR when you are prompted, click the REGISTER NOW button.

Understanding the User Interfaces

The switch software includes a set of comprehensive management functions for configuring

and monitoring the system by using one of the following methods:

• Web management interface, either over the an Ethernet network port or over the

out-of-band (OOB) port (also referred to as the service port)

• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)

• Command-line interface (CLI)

Each of the standards-based management methods allows you to configure and monitor the

components of the switch The method you use to manage the system depends on your

network size and requirements, and on your preference.

The M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches User Manual (this book)

describes how to use the web-based interface to manage and monitor the system.

Web Management Interface Overview

Your switch contains an embedded web server and management software for managing and

monitoring switch functions. The switch functions as a simple switch without the

management software. However, you can use the management software to configure more

advanced features that can improve switch efficiency and overall network performance.

Web-based management lets you monitor, configure, and control your switch remotely using

a standard web browser instead of using expensive and complicated SNMP software

products. From your web browser, you can monitor the performance of your switch and

optimize its configuration for your network. You can configure all switch features, such as

VLANs, QoS, and ACLs, by using the web-based management interface.

Getting Started

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Software Requirements for Using the Web Interface

To access the switch by using a web browser, the browser must meet the following software

requirements:

• Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 or 11

• Microsoft Edge 25

• Google Chrome 44 or 45

• Mozilla Firefox 40 or 40.6.01

• Opera 26, 29, or 31

• Apple Safari on OS X 9.0

Note: Other and later versions might work too but were not tested.

The Device View is based on HTML version 5

Use a Web Browser to Access the Switch and Log In

If this is the first time that you log in to the switch and you must use the default IP address of

the switch, see the information in the installation guide for your switch and in the M4200 and

M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Software Setup Manual.

You can use a web browser to access the switch and log in. You must be able to ping the IP

address of the management interface or out-of-band (OOB) port from your computer for web

access to be available.

IMPORTANT:

The procedures in this manual assume that you know the IP

address of your switch.

 To access the switch over the web management interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Getting Started

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Web Interface Buttons and User-Defined Fields

The following table shows the command buttons that are used on the pages in the web

interface:

IMPORTANT:

When you click the Apply button, your changes are saved for the

web management session but are not retained by the switch when it

is rebooted. You can manually save the configuration permanently

(see Save the Configuration on page 652) or you can enable the

automatic saving feature (see Configure Auto Save Mode on

page 652), which lets the switch save the configuration

permanently.

User-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the

configuration web page. All characters can be used except for the following (unless

specifically noted in for that feature):

Interface Naming Conventions

The switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and

the interface number. The physical ports are gigabit interfaces and are numbered on the front

panel. You configure the logical interfaces by using the software.

Table 1. Web interface command buttons

Button Function

Add Clicking the Add button adds the new item configured in the heading row of a table.

Apply Clicking the Apply button sends the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration

changes take effect immediately.

Cancel Clicking the Cancel button cancels the configuration on the page and resets the data on

the page to the previous values of the switch.

Delete Clicking the Delete button removes the selected item.

Update Clicking the Update button refreshes the page with the latest information from the device.

Logout Clicking the Logout button ends the session.

Table 2. Invalid characters for user-defined fields

Getting Started

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch.

Online Help

When you log in to the switch, each page contains a link to the online help that

contains information to assist in configuring and managing the switch. The online help pop-up

windows are context sensitive. For example, if the IP Addressing page is open, the help topic

for that page displays if you click the Help button.

You can connect to the online support site at netgear.com when you are logged in to the

switch.

 To access the online support link:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Help > Online Help > Support.

6. To connect to the NETGEAR support site for the M4200 and M4300 switches, click the

APPLY button.

Table 3. Naming conventions for interfaces

Interface Description Example

Physical The physical ports are Gigabit

Ethernet interfaces and are

numbered sequentially starting

from one.

0/1, 0/2, 0/3, and so on

Link aggregation group (LAG) LAG interfaces are logical

interfaces that are used only for

bridging functions.

LAG 1, LAG 2, lAG 3, and so on

CPU management interface This is the internal switch interface

responsible for the switch base

MAC address. This interface is not

configurable and is always listed in

the MAC Address Table.

5/1

Routing VLAN interfaces This is an interface used for routing

functionality.

VLAN 1, VLAN 2, VLAN 3, and

so on

Getting Started

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Web Management Interface Device View

The Device View is an HTML applet that displays the ports on the switch. This graphic

provides an alternate way to navigate to configuration and monitoring options. The graphic

also provides information about device ports, current configuration and status, tables, and

feature components.

 To use Device View:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Device View.

As an example, the following figure shows the Device View page for model M4300-52G.

As another example, the following figure shows a close up of the Device View page for

model M4300-24X.

The port coloring indicates whether a port is currently active. Green indicates that the port

is enabled; red indicates that an error occurred on the port, or that the link is disabled.

6. Click a port to see a menu that displays statistics and configuration options.

You can click a menu option to access the page that contains the configuration or

monitoring options.

Getting Started

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

If you click the graphic, but do not click a specific port, the main menu displays. This

menu contains the same options as the navigation tabs at the top of the page.

Using SNMP

The switch software supports the configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage

traps that the SNMP agent generates.

The switch uses both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs that

support additional switch functionality. All private MIBs begin with a “-” prefix. The main object

for interface configuration is in -SWITCHING-MIB, which is a private MIB. Some interface

configurations also involve objects in the public MIB, IF-MIB.

SNMP is enabled by default. The System Information page, which is the page that displays

when you log in, displays the information that you need to configure an SNMP manager to

access the switch.

Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMP v3 protocol, but for authentication and

encryption, the switch supports only one user, which is admin; therefore, only one profile can

be created or modified.

 To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMP v3 admin profile:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP v3 > User Configuration.

The User Configuration page displays.

Getting Started

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To enable authentication, select an Authentication Protocol option, which is either MD5 or

SHA.

7. To enable encryption, select the DES option in the Encryption Protocol list Then enter an

encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric characters in the Encryption Key field.

8. Click the APPLY button.

Your settings are saved.

Note: To access configuration information for SNMP V1 or SNMP V2, select

System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 and select the page that contains the

information that you want to configure.

2. Configure System Information

This chapter covers the following topics:

• Initial Setup

• Time

• Configure DNS Settings

• Configure the Switch Database Management Template Preference

• Configure Green Ethernet Settings

• Configure DHCP Server Settings

• DHCP L2 Relay

• Manage the DHCPv6 Server

• Configure PoE

• Configure SNMP

• Configure LLDP

• Configure Link Dependency

• Configure ISDP

• Timer Schedule

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Initial Setup

When you log in to a switch that has its factory settings, the Initial Setup page displays.

 To perform the initial system configuration:

1. Prepare your computer with a static IP address:

• For access over an Ethernet network port, use a static IP address in the 169.254.0.0

subnet with subnet mask 255.255.0.0.

For example, use 169.254.100.201 for your computer.

• For access over the OOB port, use a static IP address in the 192.168.0.0 subnet with

subnet mask 255.255.0.0.

For example, use 192.168.0.201 for your computer.

2. Connect an Ethernet cable from an Ethernet port on your computer to either an Ethernet

network port on the switch or to the OOB port on the switch.

3. Launch a web browser such as Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, or Microsoft Internet

Explorer.

4. Enter the default IP address of the switch in the web browser address field:

• For access over an Ethernet network port, enter 169.254.100.100.

• For access over the OOB port, enter 192.168.0.239.

The login window opens.

5. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

6. Click the Login button.

The web management interface menu displays.

7. Select System > Management > Initial Setup.

8. Enter the new password for the Admin account in the Admin Password field.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The new password does not display as you type it; only dots are shown to hide the entry.

The password is from 8 to 64 alphanumeric characters in length and is case-sensitive.

9. In the Enable Password field, enter the new password for the enable mode in the

command-line interface.

The new password does not display as you type it; only dots are shown to hide the entry.

The password is from 8 to 64 alphanumeric characters in length and is case-sensitive.

10. In the System Name field, type the name to identify this switch.

You can use a name up to 255 characters in length. The factory default is blank.

11. In the System Location field, type the location of the switch.

You can use a location up to 255 characters in length. The factory default is blank.

12. Enter the System Contact, the name of the contact person for this switch.

You can use a contact name up to 255 characters in length. The factory default is blank.

13. In the SNTP mode field, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies the state of the SNTP client. The default value is Disable, and the local

clock is used to get the time value.

14. Specify the address of the SNTP Server.

Enter a text string of up to 64 characters containing the host name of an SNTP server.

The server address can be IPv4, IPv6, or a host name. The host name resolves into an IP

address each time an SNTP request is sent to it.

15. In the Designated Source Interface list, select Management VLAN or Service Port.

This is the source interface that is used for SNMP trap, syslog, DNS, TACACS+,

RADIUS, sflow, and SNTP applications. By default, Management VLAN is used as the

source interface.

Note: If you select Management VLAN as the source interface, the routing

mode for the selected VLAN must be enabled.

16. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure the Initial IPv4 Management VLAN

 To configure the initial IPv4 management VLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Initial Setup.

The Initial Setup page displays.

6. Scroll down to display the IPv4 Management VLAN Configuration section of the page.

7. Specify the Management VLAN ID of the switch.

The management VLAN is used for management of the switch. The VLAN ID can be any

value from 1 to 4093.

8. Select the radio button to Enable or Disable the global Routing Mode on the device.

The default is Enable.

9. Select the IPv4 Address Assignment DHCP or Static radio button.

This specifies the method for getting IPv4 network parameters (IPv4 address and

network mask) for the configured management VLAN interface. The default value for

VLAN 1 is Static.

10. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the management VLAN interface.

The factory default value is 169.254.100.100.

11. In the Subnet Mask field, specify the IP subnet mask for the management VLAN interface.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask and defines the portion of the

interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. The factory default

value is 255.255.0.0.

12. In the Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the management VLAN interface.

The default value is 0.0.0.0.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure the Initial IPv6 Management VLAN

For IPv6 management, you can use the same management VLAN that you use for IPv4

management or you can use a different VLAN. By default, the switch does not include an

IPv6 management VLAN and you must set it up manually if you want to use it.

 To configure the initial IPv6 management VLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Initial Setup.

The Initial Setup page displays.

6. Scroll down to display the IPv6 Management VLAN Configuration section of the page.

7. Specify the Management VLAN ID of the switch.

The management VLAN is used for management of the switch. The VLAN ID can be any

value from 1 to 4093. There is no IPv6 management interface configured by default.

8. Select an IPv6 Address Assignment radio button.

This specifies the method for getting IPv6 network parameters (IPv6 prefix and prefix

length) for the configured management VLAN interface. The possible options are

DHCPv6, Auto Config, or Static. The default value for VLAN 1 is Auto Config.

9. In the IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix and prefix length for the

management VLAN interface.

When Auto Config is selected, the appropriate IPv6 prefix and prefix length is displayed

in this field.

10. In the IPv6 Gateway field, specify the default IPv6 gateway for the management VLAN

interface.

11. Click the Apply button.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure the Initial Service Port Settings

 To perform the initial service port configuration:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Click System > Management > Initial Setup.

The Initial Setup page displays.

6. Scroll down to the bottom of the page to display the Service Port Configuration section.

7. Select an IPv4 Address Assignment radio button.

This specifies the method for getting IPv4 network parameters (IPv4 address and

network mask) for the service port. Possible options are DHCP, BootP, or Static. The

default value is Static.

8. Specify the IP Address for the service port.

The factory default value is 192.168.0.239.

9. Specify the Subnet Mask for the service port.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask and defines the portion of the

interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. The factory default

value is 255.255.255.0.

10. Specify the default Gateway for the service port.

The default value is 0.0.0.0.

11. In the IPv6 Address Assignment field, select the method for getting IPv6 network

parameters (IPv6 prefix and prefix length) for the configured service port.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Possible options are DHCPv6, Auto Config, or Static. The default value is Auto Config.

12. Specify the IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length for the service port.

When Auto Config is selected, the appropriate IPv6 prefix and prefix length are displayed

in this field.

13. Specify the default IPv6 Gateway for the service port.

14. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View or Define System Information

When you log in, the System Information page displays. You can configure and view general

device information.

 To view or define system information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > System Information.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Define the following fields:

• System Name. Enter the name to identify this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.

• System Location. Enter the location of this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.

• System Contact. Enter the contact person for this switch. You can use up to 255

alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.

• Login Timeout. Specify how many minutes of inactivity can occur on a serial port

connection before the switch closes the connection. Enter a number between 0 and

160 minutes. The factory default is 5. Entering 0 disables the time-out.

• Management Source Interface. Select the management interface that is used as

source interface for SNMP trap, syslog, DNS, TACACS+, RADIUS, sflow, and SNTP

applications. Possible values are as follows:

- None

- Routing Interface

- Routing VLAN

- Routing Loopback Interface

- Service Port

- Different. For some applications from the list, the source interface is configured

separately. They display in the list only if this is the case.

By default VLAN 1 is used as the source interface.

7. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the status information the System Information page displays.

Table 4. System Information

Field Description

Product Name The product name of this switch.

IPv4 Management Address The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the management VLAN

interface.

IPv6 Management Address The IPv6 address and mask assigned to the management VLAN

interface.

IPv4 Management Interface The IPv4 management VLAN ID of the switch. Click the displayed

Management VLAN ID value to jump to the configuration page. See

Configure an IPv4 Management VLAN on page 49.

IPv6 Management Interface The IPv6 management VLAN ID of the switch. Click the displayed

Management VLAN ID value to jump to the configuration page. See

Configure an IPv6 Management VLAN on page 51.

IPv4 Loopback Interface The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the loopback interface.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View the Fan Status

This page shows the status of the fans in all units. These fans remove the heat generated by

the power, CP,U and other chipsets, and allow the chipsets work normally. Fan status has

three possible values: OK, Failure, and Not Present.

 To view the fan status:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Management > System Information > Fan Status.

IPv6 Loopback Interface The IPv6 prefix and prefix length assigned to the loopback interface.

System Date The current date.

Current SNTP Sync Status The current SNTP sync status.

System SNMP OID The base object ID for the switch's enterprise MIB.

System Mac Address Universally assigned network address.

Service Port MAC Address The MAC address used for out-of-band connectivity.

L2 MAC Address The MAC address used for communications on the Layer 2 network

segment.

L3 MAC Address The MAC address used for communications on the Layer 3 network

segment.

Current SNTP Synchronized Time The SNTP synchronized time.

Table 4. System Information (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Fan Status information.

View the Temperature Sensor Information

You can view the current temperature of different system sensors using the Temperature

Status table. The temperature is instant and can be refreshed with the latest information on

the switch when the Update button is clicked. The maximum temperature of the CPU and

MACs depends on the actual hardware.

 To view temperature information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > System Information > Temperature Sensors.

Table 5. Fan Status

Field Description

Unit ID The unit ID of the switch to which the fan belongs.

System-1 The working status of the System-1 fan in each unit.

System-2 The working status of the System-2 fan in each unit.

System-3 The working status of the System-3 fan in each unit.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Temperature Status information.

View the Device Status

This page shows the software version of each device.

 To view the device status:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Management > System Information > Device Status.

Table 6. Temperature Status information

Field Description

Unit ID The unit number in the switch.

MAC-A The current temperature (in degrees Centigrade) of the MAC-A sensor

of the switch. The maximum is 31°C.

MAC-B The current temperature (in degrees Centigrade) of the MAC-B sensor

of the switch. The maximum is 37°C.

System The current temperature (in degrees Centigrade) of the System sensor

of the switch. The maximum is 31°C.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Device Status information.

Table 7. Device Status

Field Description

Unit ID The unit number in the switch.

Firmware Version The release.version.maintenance number of the code currently running

on the switch. For example, if the release was 1, the version was 2, and

the maintenance number was 4, the format would be 1.2.4.

Boot Version The version of the boot code that is in the flash memory to load the

firmware into the memory.

CPLD Version The version of the software for CPLD.

Serial Number The serial number of this switch.

Internal AC-1, Internal AC-2, and

so on

Indicates the status of the appropriate power module in each unit.

Status can be any of the following:

• Operational. Power module is present and functioning properly.

• Powering. Main power is failed or disconnected but RPS provides

power to the switch.

• Not Present. Power module is not present in the slot.

• Not powered. Power module is present but not connected to the

power source.

• Not powering. Power module is present and connected but the

switch uses another power source.

• Incompatible. Power module is present but incompatible.

• Failed. Power module is present, but power cable is not plugged in

or a bad cable is plugged in.

System Up Time The time in days, hours, and minutes since the last switch reboot.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View the System CPU Status

 To view the system CPU status:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > System CPU Status.

6. You can view the CPU Utilization information, which contains the memory information,

task-related information, and percentage of CPU utilization per task.

• Select the Unit No. to display the CPU Utilization information.

• Select All to display the CPU Utilization information for all units in a switch.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes CPU Memory Status information.

Configure the CPU Thresholds

The CPU Utilization Threshold notification feature allows you to configure thresholds that,

when crossed, trigger a notification. The notification is done through SNMP trap and syslog

messages.

 To configure the CPU thresholds:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > System CPU Status > CPU Threshold.

6. Configure the Rising Threshold value.

Notification is generated when the total CPU utilization exceeds this threshold value over

the configured time period. The range is 1 to 100.

7. Configure the Rising Interval value.

This utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 to 86400 seconds in

multiples of 5 seconds.

Table 8. CPU Memory Status information

Field Description

Total System Memory The total memory of the switch in KBytes.

Available Memory The available memory space for the switch in KBytes.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

8. Configure the Falling Threshold.

Notification is triggered when the total CPU utilization falls below this level for a

configured period of time.

The falling utilization threshold must be equal to or less than the rising threshold value.

The falling utilization threshold notification is made only if a rising threshold notification

was done previously. Configuring the falling utilization threshold and time period is

optional. If the Falling CPU utilization parameters are not configured, then it takes the

same value as Rising CPU utilization parameters. The range is 1 to 100.

9. Configure the Falling Interval.

The utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 seconds to 86400

seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.

10. Configure the CPU Free Memory Threshold value in KB.

11. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View and Clear Switch Statistics

 To view and clear the switch statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Switch Statistics.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To clear all the counters, resetting all switch summary and detailed statistics to default

values, click the Clear button.

The discarded packets count cannot be cleared.

The following table describes Switch Statistics information.

Table 9. Switch Statistics information

Field Description

ifIndex The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with the processor of

this switch.

Octets Received The total number of octets of data received by the processor (excluding

framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets Received Without Errors The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multicast

packets) received by the processor.

Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer

protocol.

Multicast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast

address. This number does not include packets directed to the

broadcast address.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to the

broadcast address. This does not include multicast packets.

Receive Packets Discarded The number of inbound packets that were discarded even though no

errors were detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer

protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up

buffer space.

Octets Transmitted The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including

framing characters.

Packets Transmitted Without Errors The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.

Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested that

are transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that

were discarded or not sent.

Multicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested that

are transmitted to a multicast address, including those that were

discarded or not sent.

Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested that

are transmitted to the broadcast address, including those that were

discarded or not sent.

Transmit Packets Discarded The number of outbound packets that were discarded even though no

errors were detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer

protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up

buffer space.

Most Address Entries Ever Used The highest number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries

learned by this switch since the most recent reboot.

Address Entries in Use The number of learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database

Address Table for this switch.

Maximum VLAN Entries The maximum number of virtual LANs (VLANs) allowed on this switch.

Most VLAN Entries Ever Used The largest number of VLANs that were active on this switch since the

last reboot.

Static VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that were

created statically.

Dynamic VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that were

created by GVRP registration.

VLAN Deletes The number of VLANs on this switch that were created and then deleted

since the last reboot.

Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds, since the

statistics for this switch were last cleared.

Table 9. Switch Statistics information (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View USB Device Information

 To display the USB device information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > USB Device Information.

The Device Status field displays the current status of the device. The status is one of the

following:

• Active. The device is USB plugged in and recognized by the switch.

• Inactive. The device is not mounted.

• Invalid. The device is not present or an invalid device is plugged in.

6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

The following table describes the USB Memory Statistics information.

Table 10. USB Memory Statistics information

Field Description

Total Size The USB flash device storage size in bytes.

Bytes Used The size of memory used on the USB flash device.

Bytes Free The size of memory free on the USB flash device.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the USB Directory Details information.

View Slot Information

You can view information about the cards installed in the switch’s slots. This page also

provides information about the cards and switches that are compatible with the device.

 To view slot information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Slot Information.

Table 11. USB Directory Details information

Field Description

File Name The name of the file stored in the USB flash drive.

File Size The size of the file stored in the USB flash drive in bytes

Modification Time The last modification time of the file stored in the USB flash drive.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes information in the Slot Summary table.

The following table describes information in the Supported Card table.

The following table describes information in the Supported Switch table. When you

preconfigure a new stack member, the switch index identifies the type of switch that is being

added to the stack.

Table 12. Slot Summary table

Field Description

Slot The slot number.

Status Indicates whether the slot is empty or full.

Administrative State Indicates whether the slot is administratively enabled or disabled.

Power State Indicates whether the device is providing power to the slot.

Configured Card Model ID The model ID of the card configured for the slot.

Configured Card Description The description of the card configured for the slot

Inserted Card Model ID The model ID of the card plugged into the slot.

Inserted Card Description The description of the card plugged into the slot.

Card Power Down If the value is True, the power state can be administratively enabled

or disabled. If the value is False, the power state cannot be

configured.

Card Pluggable If the value is True, the card can be administratively enabled or

disabled. If the value is False, the administrative state cannot be

configured.

Table 13. Supported Card table

Field Description

Card Model The model ID of the supported card.

Card Index The index assigned to the card type.

Card Type The hardware type of the supported card, which is assigned by the

manufacturer.

Card Descriptor Description of the supported card, which includes the

manufacturer's product number and information about number and

speed of the supported interfaces.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure a Loopback Interface

You can create, configure, and remove loopback interfaces.

 To configure a loopback interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Loopback Interface.

6. Use the Loopback Interface Type list to select IPv4 or IPv6 loopback interface.

7. In the Loopback ID list, select a list of currently configured loopback interfaces.

8. In the Primary IP Address field, enter the primary address for this interface in

dotted-decimal notation.

This option is visible when IPv4 loopback is selected.

Table 14. Supported Switch

Field Description

Switch Model ID The model number of the supported switch.

Switch Index The index assigned to the supported switch.

Management Preference The management preference of the supported switch.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

9. In the Primary IP Subnet Mask field, enter the primary IPv4 subnet mask in dotted-decimal

notation.

This option is visible when IPv4 loopback is selected.

10. In the Secondary IP Address field, enter the secondary IP address in dotted-decimal

notation.

This input field is visible only when Add Secondary is selected. This option is visible

when IPv4 loopback is selected.

11. In the Secondary Subnet Mask field, enter the secondary subnet mask for this interface in

dotted-decimal notation.

This input field is visible only when Add Secondary is selected. This option is visible

when IPv4 loopback is selected.

12. In the IPv6 mode field, enable IPv6 on this interface using the IPv6 address.

This option is configurable before you specify an explicit IPv6 address. This option is

visible when IPv6 loopback is selected.

13. Use the IPv6 Address field to enter the IPv6 address in the format prefix/length.

This option is visible when IPv6 loopback is selected.

14. Use the EUI64 field to optionally specify the 64-bit extended unique identifier (EUI-64).

This option is visible when IPv6 loopback is selected.

15. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Management Interfaces

The Web management interface includes separate options for interface and port-based IP

management. Port-based IP management disables VLAN-based (default/existing) IP

management once you configure the port-based IP management and vice versa.

The source interface for applications is set to VLAN 1 by default. Changes in IPv4

Management VLAN and port to a non-default value also sets the source interface to the

VLAN 1 default VLAN/port automatically.

Configure the IPv4 Service Port

You can configure network information on the IPv4 service port. The service port is a

dedicated Ethernet port for out-of-band management of the device. Traffic on this port is

segregated from operational network traffic on the switch ports and cannot be switched or

routed to the operational network.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

 To configure the IPv4 service port:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv4 Service Port

Configuration.

6. Select a Service Port Configuration Protocol radio button:

• BootP. During the next boot cycle, the BootP client on the device broadcasts a BootP

request in an attempt to acquire information from a BootP server on the network.

• DHCP. During the next boot cycle, the DHCP client on the device broadcasts a DHCP

request in an attempt to acquire information from a DHCP server on the network.

• None. The device does not attempt to acquire network information dynamically.

• This specifies how the device acquires network information on the service port.

7. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the interface.

• If the service port configuration protocol is None, you can manually configure a static

IP address.

• If the service port configuration protocol is BootP or DHCP, this field displays the IP

address that was dynamically acquired (if any).

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

8. In the Subnet Mask field, specify the IP subnet mask for the interface:

• If the service port configuration protocol is None, you can manually configure a static

subnet mask.

• If the service port configuration protocol is BootP or DHCP, this field displays the

subnet mask that was dynamically acquired (if any).

9. In the Default Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the IP interface:

• If the Service Port Configuration Protocol is None, you can manually configure the IP

address of the default gateway.

• If the Service Port Configuration Protocol is BootP or DHCP, this field displays the

default gateway address that was dynamically acquired (if any).

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the Service Port Configuration

page.

Configure the IPv6 Service Port

You can configure IPv6 network information on the service port. The service port is a

dedicated Ethernet port for out-of-band management of the device. Traffic on this port is

segregated from operational network traffic on the switch ports and cannot be switched or

routed to the operational network.

 To configure the IPv6 service port:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Service Port

Configuration.

Table 15. IPv4 Service Port Configuration

Field Description

Burned-in MAC Address The burned-in MAC address used for out-of-band connectivity.

Interface Status Indicates whether the link status is up or down.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Select the IPv6 mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies the IPv6 administrative mode on the service port.

7. Select the Service Port Configuration Protocol None or DHCP radio button.

This specifies whether the device acquires network information from a DHCPv6 server.

Selecting None disables the DHCPv6 client on the service port.

8. Select the IPv6 Stateless Address AutoConfig mode Enable or Disable radio button:

• Enable. The service port can acquire an IPv6 address through IPv6 Neighbor

Discovery Protocol (NDP) and through the use of router advertisement messages.

• Disable. The service port does not use the native IPv6 address autoconfiguration

feature to acquire an IPv6 address.

This sets the IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration mode on the service port.

9. The DHCPv6 Client DUID field displays the client identifier used by the DHCPv6 client (if

enabled) when sending messages to the DHCPv6 server.

10. To configure the IPv6 gateway, select the Change IPv6 Gateway check box.

The IPv6 gateway is the default gateway for the IPv6 service port interface.

11. Use the IPv6 Gateway field to specify the default gateway for the IPv6 service port interface.

The Add/Delete IPv6 Address table lists the manually configured static IPv6 addresses

on the service port interface.

12. Specify the following:

a. In the IPv6 Address field, specify the IPv6 address to add or remove from the service

port interface.

b. Select the EUI Flag option to enable the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI) flag for

IPv6 address, or clear the option to omit the flag.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

13. Click the Add button.

The IPv6 address is added to the service port interface.

14. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Management VLAN Overview

For you to manage the device by using the web-based configuration utility, the device

management IP address must be defined and known. A management VLAN interface is

created by default and it gets an IP address if a DHCP server is present. If it fails to get an IP

address, a fallback address 169.254.100.100/255.255.0.0 is assigned to it. Management

VLAN is used as the default source interface for syslog, message log, and SNMP client, and

so on The network interface is disabled by default.

The management VLAN is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch

through any of the switch’s front panel ports. The configuration parameters associated with

the switch’s management VLAN do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports

through which traffic is switched or routed.

To access the switch over a network, you must first configure it with IP information (IP

address, subnet mask). You can configure the IP information using any of the following:

• DHCP

• Terminal interface through the EIA-232 port

After you establish in-band connectivity, you can change the IP information using any of the

following:

• Terminal interface through the EIA-232 port

• Terminal interface through Telnet

• SNMP-based management

• Web-based management

Configure an IPv4 Management VLAN

 To configure an IPv4 Management VLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv4 Management VLAN

Configuration.

6. In the Management VLAN ID field, specify the Management VLAN ID of the switch. The

management VLAN is used for management of the switch. It can be configured to any value

in the range of 1–4093.

7. Select the Routing Mode radio button to Enable or Disable the global routing on the

device. The default value is Enable.

8. Select the Configuration Method DHCP or Manual radio button:

• DHCP. Transmit a DHCP request.

• Manual. Do nothing.

This specifies what the switch does on start-up.

9. Specify the IP Address of the interface.

The factory default value is 169.254.100.100.

10. Specify the IP Subnet Mask for the interface. This is also referred to as the subnet/network

mask and defines the portion of the interface’s IP address that is used to identify the

attached network.

The factory default value is 255.255.0.0.

11. Specify the Gateway for the management VLAN interface.

The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.

12. In the Reset IPv4 Management Interface section of the page, use the Set Management

Interface to Default option to set the IPv4 management interface to the default VLAN 1.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The Current IPv4 Management Interface Status is displayed at the bottom of the page.

The table below describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Configure an IPv6 Management VLAN

To configure IPv6 Management, you have the choice to configure IPv6 Management using

the same VLAN as is used for IPv4 Management or using a different VLAN. IPv6

Management configuration is non-default and you need to create it manually.

 To configure an IPv6 management VLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

Table 16. Nonconfigurable IPv4 Management Interface Status

Field Description

Management Interface Displays the current IPv4 management interface

Link State Indicates whether the link status is up or down.

Routing Interface Status Indicates whether the link status is up or down for the management

interface.

MAC Address The MAC address assigned to the management interface.

IP Address Configuration Method Indicates whether the IP address configuration method is DHCP or

manual.

IP Address The IP address of the management interface.

Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask for the management interface.

Gateway The specified default gateway for the management interface.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Management VLAN

Configuration.

6. In the Management VLAN ID field, specify the Management VLAN ID of the switch. The

management VLAN is used for management of the switch. The VLAN ID can be any value

from 1 to 4093. There is no IPv6 management interface configured by default.

7. Select the IPv6 Enable Mode radio button to Enable or Disable the administration mode

for the management VLAN IPv6 interface on the switch.

8. Select the radio button to Enable or Disable Address Autoconfigure Mode. If you select

Enable, the IPv6 network parameters (IPv6 prefix and prefix length) are autoconfigured for

the configured management VLAN interface. The default value for VLAN 1 is Auto Config.

Note: The Address Autoconfigure mode option is available only if unicast

routing is globally disabled.

9. Select the Address DHCP Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

10. In the IPv6 VLAN Interface Configuration section of the page, select the IPv6 Prefix/Prefix

Length option, then specify the IPv6 address to add or remove from the management VLAN

interface. When Address Autoconfigure Mode is selected, the appropriate IPv6 prefix and

prefix length is shown in this field.

11. Select the EU164 option to True (enabled) the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI) flag for an

IPv6 address. The value is False if not specified.

12. Click the Add button.

The IPv6 address is added to the management VLAN.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

In the IPv6 Default Route Configuration section of the page, the nonconfigurable IPv6

Default Route that is displayed is the default route for the IPv6 VLAN interface.

14. To make changes, do the following:

• To add or remove the IPv6 default route, select the Change IPv6 Default Route

option, and specify the address value in the IPv6 Default Route Address field.

• To reset the IPv6 management interface to the default VLAN 1, select the Set

Management Interface to Default option.

15. If you make any changes, click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

By default there is no IPv6 Management Interface.

The current IPv6 Management Interface Status is displayed at the bottom of the page.

The table below describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 17. Current IPv6 Management Interface Status

Field Description

Management Interface Displays the current IPv6 management interface

Link State Indicates whether the link status is up or down.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure an IPv4 Management Interface

Use this page for port-based IP management for IPv4.

 To configure an IPv4 management interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv4 Management Interface

Configuration.

IPv6 Routing Interface

Status/Operational Mode

Indicates whether the link status is up or down for the management

interface.

MAC Address The MAC address assigned to the management interface.

IPv6 Enable Mode Indicates whether IPv6 Enable Mode on the management interface is

enabled or disabled.

IPv6 Routing Mode Indicates whether IPv6 Routing Mode on the management interface is

enabled or disabled.

Stateless Address Autoconfig

Mode

Indicates whether the IP address autoconfiguration mode on the

management interface is enabled or disabled.

DHCPv6 Client Mode The Address DHCP mode on the management interface.

IPv6 Default Gateway The IPv6 default gateway of the switch.

IPv6 Next Hop Interface The IPv6 next hop interface of the switch.

Prefix Length The prefix length on the management interface.

EU164 The EUI-64 flag of the IPv6 address on the management interface.

Current State The current state of the IPv6 address on the management interface.

Table 17. Current IPv6 Management Interface Status

Field Description

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use the Interface list to select the interface for which IPv4 parameters or management

interface can be changed.

7. When you select the Set Management Interface option, it means that the management

interface must be configured based on the interface selected.

By default, this option is not selected.

8. Select the Configuration Method DHCP or Manual radio button.

9. Specify the IP Address of the interface and the subnet mask for the management interface.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask, and defines the portion of the

interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. The factory default

value is 169.254.100.100.

10. In the Subnet Mask field, specify the IP subnet mask for the interface.

The factory default value is 255.255.0.0.

11. In the Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the management interface.

The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Note: If you need to reset the IPv4 management interface, in the Reset IPv4

Management Interface section of the page, use the Set Management

Interface to Default option to delete the port-based IPv4

management interface configuration and set the IPv4 management

interface back to the default VLAN 1.

12. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The Current IPv4 Management Interface Status is displayed at the bottom of the page.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The table below describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Configure an IPv6 Management Interface

Use this page for port-based IP management for IPv6.

 To configure an IPv6 management interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

Table 18. Nonconfigurable IPv4 Management Interface Status

Field Description

Management Interface Displays the current IPv4 management interface

Link State Indicates whether the link status is up or down.

Routing Interface Status Indicates whether the link status is up or down for the management

interface.

MAC Address The MAC address assigned to the management interface.

IP Address Configuration Method Indicates whether the IP address configuration method is DHCP or

manual.

IP Address The IP address of the management interface.

Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask for the management interface.

Gateway The specified default gateway for the management interface.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Management Interface

Configuration.

6. Use the Interface list to select the interface for which IPv6 parameters or management

interface can be changed.

7. When you select the Set Management Interface option, it means that the management

interface must be configured based on the interface selected. By default, this option is not

selected.

8. Select the radio button to enable or disable the Routing Mode on the management

interface.

9. Select the radio button to enable or disable the IPv6 Mode on the management interface.

10. Select the radio button to enable or disable the DHCPv6 Client Mode on the management

interface.

11. Select the radio button to enable or disable the Address Autoconfigure Mode on the

management interface.

Note: The Address AutoConfigure Mode option is available only if Unicast

Routing is globally disabled.

12. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

In the IPv6 Default Route Configuration section of the page, the nonconfigurable IPv6

Default Route that is displayed is the default route for the IPv6 management interface.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

13. To make changes, do the following:

• To add or remove the IPv6 default route, select the Change IPv6 Default Route

option, and specify the address value in the IPv6 Default Route Address field.

• In the Reset IPv6 Management Interface section of the page, use the Set

Management Interface to Default option to delete the port-based IPv6 management

interface configuration and set the IPv6 management interface back to the default

VLAN 1.

14. If you make any changes, click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The current IPv6 Management Interface Status is displayed at the bottom of the page. The

table below describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 19. Current IPv6 Management Interface Status

Field Description

Management Interface Displays the current IPv6 management interface

Link State Indicates whether the link status is up or down.

IPv6 Routing Interface

Status/Operational Mode

Indicates whether the link status is up or down for the management

interface.

MAC Address The MAC address assigned to the management interface.

IP Address Configuration Method Indicates whether the IP address configuration method is DHCP or

manual.

IP Address The IP address of the management interface.

Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask for the management interface.

Gateway The specified default gateway for the management interface.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Time

The switch software supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). As its name

suggests, it is a less complicated version of Network Time Protocol, which is a system for

synchronizing the clocks of networked computer systems, primarily when data transfer is

handled through the Internet.

Configure the Time Setting

 To configure the time setting:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration.

6. Select the Clock Source Local or SNTP radio button.

The default is SNTP. The local clock can be set to SNTP only if the following two

conditions are met:

• The SNTP server is configured.

• The SNTP last attempt status is successful.

7. In the Date field, specify the current date in months, days, and years.

8. In the Time field, specify the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure the SNTP Global Settings

 To configure the SNTP global settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration > SNTP Global

Configuration.

When you select the SNTP option as the Clock Source, the SNTP Global Configuration

section is displayed below the Time Configuration section of the page.

6. Select a Client mode radio button to specify the mode of operation of the SNTP client:

• Disable. SNTP is not operational. No SNTP requests are sent from the client and no

received SNTP messages are processed.

• Unicast. SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request

to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can

determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative

to the server.

• Broadcast. SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local

broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address has a

single subnet scope while a multicast address has Internet wide scope.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The default value is Unicast.

7. In the Port field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.

The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and the value 123. The default value is 123. When

the default value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is

assigned by the operating system.

8. Select the Source Interface to use for the SNTP client.

Possible values are as follows:

• None

• VLAN 1

• Routing interface

• Routing VLAN

• Routing loopback interface

• Tunnel interface

• Service port

By default VLAN 1 is used as the source interface.

9. Specify the Unicast Poll Interval.

This is the number of seconds between unicast poll requests expressed as a power of

two when configured in unicast mode. The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is

10. Specify the Broadcast Poll Interval.

This is the number of seconds between broadcast poll requests expressed as a power of

2 when configured in broadcast mode. Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this

interval are discarded. The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.

11. Specify the Unicast Poll Timeout.

This is the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP response when configured in unicast

mode. The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.

12. Specify the Unicast Poll Retry.

This is the number of times to retry a request to an SNTP server after the first time-out

before attempting to use the next configured server when configured in unicast mode.

The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.

13. Use the Time Zone Name field to configure a time zone specifying the number of hours

and, optionally, the number of minutes difference from UTC with Offset Hours and Offset

Minutes.

The time zone can affect the display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.

When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch's clock, the time data received

from the server is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), which is the same as

Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time zone in which the switch is

located.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

14. Use the Offset Hours field to specify the number of hours of difference from UTC.

The allowed range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.

15. Use the Offset Minutes field to specify the number of minutes of difference from UTC.

The allowed range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.

16. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View SNTP Global Status

When you select the SNTP option as the Clock Source, the SNTP global status is displayed

below the SNTP Global Configuration section of the page.

 To view SNTP global status:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration > SNTP Global Status

6. Select the SNTP option as the Clock Source.

The SNTP Global Status is displayed below the SNTP Global Configuration section.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table displays the nonconfigurable SNTP Global Status information.

Table 20. SNTP Global Status

Field Description

Version The SNTP version that the client supports.

Supported mode The SNTP modes that the client supports. Multiple modes can be

supported by a client.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP client last updated the

system clock.

Last Attempt Time The local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt of an

unsolicited message.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both

unicast and broadcast modes. If no message was received from a

server, a status of Other is displayed. These values are appropriate for

all operational modes.

• Other. None of the following enumeration values.

• Success. The SNTP operation was successful and the system

time was updated.

• Request Timed Out. A directed SNTP request timed out without

receiving a response from the SNTP server.

• Bad Date Encoded. The time provided by the SNTP server is not

valid.

• Version Not Supported. The SNTP version supported by the

server is not compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized. The SNTP server is not synchronized

with its peers. This is indicated through the leap indicator field on

the SNTP message.

• Server Kiss Of Death. The SNTP server indicated that no further

queries were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a

stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server.

Server IP Address The IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no

message was received from any server, an empty string is shown.

Address Type The address type of the SNTP server address for the last received valid

packet.

Server Stratum The claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.

Reference Clock ID The reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid

packet.

Server mode The mode of the server for the last received valid packet.

Unicast Server Max Entries The maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured

on this client.

Unicast Server Current Entries The number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this

client.

Broadcast Count The number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that were

received and processed by the SNTP client since the last reboot.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure an SNTP Server

SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.

Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. The switch software operates

only as an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.

Time sources are established by stratums. Stratums define the accuracy of the reference

clock. The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The

device receives time from Stratum 1 and above since it is itself a Stratum 2 device.

The following is an example of stratums:

• Stratum 0. A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.

• Stratum 1. A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1

time servers provide primary network time standards.

• Stratum 2. The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.

For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, through NTP, from

a Stratum 1 server.

Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server

type.

SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:

• T1. Time that the original request was sent by the client.

• T2. Time that the original request was received by the server.

• T3. Time that the server sent a reply.

• T4. Time that the client received the server's reply.

The device can poll unicast server types for the server time.

Polling for unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.

SNTP servers that were configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for

synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the

preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this

method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the

device using the SNTP Server Configuration page.

The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or

at every poll interval.

You can view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time Protocol

SNTP servers.

 To configure the SNTP server settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration.

6. In the Server Type list, select the address type of the configured SNTP server address.

Possible values are as follows:

• IPv4

• IPv6

• DNS

The default value is IPv4.

7. In the Address field, specify the address of the SNTP server.

This is a text string of up to 64 characters, containing the encoded unicast IP address or

host name of an SNTP server. Unicast SNTP requests are sent to this address. If this

address is a DNS host name, then that host name is resolved into an IP address each

time an SNTP request is sent to it.

8. Enter a Port number on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent.

The valid range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 123.

9. Specify the Priority of this server entry in determining the sequence of servers to which

SNTP requests are sent.

The client continues sending requests to different servers until a successful response is

received, or all servers are exhausted. The priority indicates the order in which to query

the servers. A server entry with a precedence of 1 is queried before a server with a

priority of 2, and so forth. If more than one server has the same priority, then the

requesting order follows the lexicographical ordering of the entries in this table. The valid

range is 1 to 3. The default value is 1.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

10. Specify the NTP Version running on the server.

The range is 1 to 4. The default value is 4.

11. Click the Add button.

The SNTP server entry is added. This sends the updated configuration to the switch.

Configuration changes take effect immediately.

12. Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers.

You can configure up to three SNTP servers.

13. To change the settings for an existing SNTP server, select the check box next to the

configured server and enter new values in the available fields.

14. To remove an SNTP server entry, select the check box next to the configured server to

remove, and then click the Delete button.

The entry is removed, and the device is updated.

15. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers

configured on your switch. The following table displays SNTP Server Status information.

Table 21. SNTP Server Status

Field Description

Address All the existing server addresses. If no server configuration exists, a

message saying No SNTP server exists flashes on the page.

Last Update Time The local date and time (UTC) that the response from this server was

used to update the system clock.

Last Attempt Time The local date and time (UTC) that this SNTP server was last queried.

Last Attempt Status The status of the last S9 NTP request to this server. If no packet was

received from this server, a status of Other is displayed.

• Other. None of the following enumeration values.

• Success. The SNTP operation was successful and the system

time was updated.

• Request Timed Out. A directed SNTP request timed out without

receiving a response from the SNTP server.

• Bad Date Encoded. The time provided by the SNTP server is not

valid.

• Version Not Supported. The SNTP version supported by the

server is not compatible with the version supported by the client.

• Server Unsynchronized. The SNTP server is not synchronized

with its peers. This is indicated through the leap indicator field on

the SNTP message.

• Server Kiss Of Death. The SNTP server indicated that no further

queries were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a

stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings

 To configure the Daylight Saving Time settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > Daylight Saving Configuration.

6. Select Daylight Saving (DST) radio button:

• Disable. Disable daylight saving time.

• Recurring. Enable Recurring daylight saving time.

• Recurring EU. Enable recurring EU daylight saving time.

Requests The number of SNTP requests made to this server since last agent

reboot.

Failed Requests The number of failed SNTP requests made to this server since last

reboot.

Table 21. SNTP Server Status (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

• Recurring USA. Enable recurring USA daylight saving time.

• Non Recurring. Configure non-recurring daylight saving time.

7. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The fields in the following tables are visible only when DayLight Saving is Recurring or

Recurring EU or Recurring USA.

The fields in the following table are visible only when DayLight Saving is Non Recurring.

Table 22. DayLight Saving - Recurring

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Week. Configure the start week.

• Day. Configure the start day.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Hours. Configure the start hours.

• Minutes. Configure the start minutes.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Week. Configure the end week.

• Day. Configure the end day.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Hours. Configure the end hours.

• Minutes. Configure the end minutes.

Offset Configure recurring offset in minutes. The valid range is 1–1440

minutes.

Zone Configure the time zone.

Table 23. DayLight Saving - Non Recurring

Field Description

Begins At These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.

• Week. Configure the start week.

• Day. Configure the start day.

• Month. Configure the start month.

• Hours. Configure the start hours.

• Minutes. Configure the start minutes.

Ends At These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.

• Week. Configure the end week.

• Day. Configure the end day.

• Month. Configure the end month.

• Hours. Configure the end hours.

• Minutes. Configure the end minutes.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View the DayLight Saving Time Status

 To view the DayLight Saving Time status:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration.

6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

Offset Configure the non-recurring offset in minutes. The valid range is

1–1440 minutes.

Zone Configure the time zone.

Table 23. DayLight Saving - Non Recurring

Field Description

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table displays the nonconfigurable Daylight Saving (DST) status information.

Configure DNS Settings

You can configure information about DNS servers that the network uses and how the switch

operates as a DNS client.

Configure Global DNS Settings

You can configure global DNS settings and DNS server information.

 To configure the global DNS settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration.

Table 24. DayLight Saving Status

Field Description

Daylight Saving (DST) The Daylight Saving value, which is one of the following:

• Disable

• Recurring

• Recurring EU

• Recurring USA

• Non Recurring

Begins At Displays when the daylight saving time begins. This field is not

displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.

Ends At Displays when the daylight saving time ends. This field is not displayed

when daylight saving time is disabled.

Offset (in Minutes) The offset value in minutes.This field is not displayed when daylight

saving time is disabled.

Zone The zone acronym. This field is not displayed when daylight saving

time is disabled.

Daylight Saving (DST) in Effect Displays whether daylight saving time is in effect.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Select the DNS Status Disable or Enable radio button:

• Enable. Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS

domain name. The default value is Enable.

• Disable. Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries.

7. Enter the DNS Default domain Name to include in DNS queries.

When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified host name, this field is

provides the domain name (for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the

user enters test, then test is changed to test.netgear.com to resolve the name). The

length of the name must not be longer than 255 characters.

8. Use Retry Number to specify the number of times to retry sending DNS queries to the DNS

server.

This number ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 2.

9. Use Response Timeout (secs) to specify the amount of time, in seconds, to wait for a

response to a DNS query.

This time-out ranges from 0 to 3600. The default value is 3.

10. Specify the Source Interface to use for DNS.

Possible values are as follows:

• None

• VLAN 1

• Routing interface

• Routing VLAN

• Routing loopback interface

• Tunnel interface

• Service port

By default VLAN 1 is used as the source interface.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

11. To specify the DNS server to which the switch sends DNS queries, enter an IP address in

standard IPv4 dot notation in the DNS Server Address field and click the Add button.

The server appears in the list. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The precedence

is set in the order created.

12. To remove a DNS server from the list, select its check box and click the Delete button.

If you click the Delete button without selecting a DNS server, all the DNS servers are

deleted.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information.

Add a Static Entry to the Local DNS Table

You can manually map host names to IP addresses or to view dynamic DNS mappings.

 To add a static entry to the local DNS table:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Table 25. DNS Server Configuration

Field Description

Serial No The sequence number of the DNS server.

Preference Shows the preference of the DNS server. The preference is determined

by the order in which they were entered.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration.

6. In the Host Name (1 to 255 characters) field, specify the static host name to add.

Its length cannot exceed 255 characters and it is a mandatory field.

7. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address in standard IPv4 dot notation to associate with

the host name.

8. Click the Add button.

The entry appears in the list on the page.

The Dynamic Host Mapping table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch

learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields.

Configure the Switch Database Management Template

Preference

A Switch Database Management (SDM) template is a description of the maximum resources

a switch or router can use for various features. Different SDM templates allow different

combinations of scaling factors, enabling different allocations of resources depending on how

the device is used. In other words, SDM templates enable you to reallocate system

resources to support a different mix of features based on your network requirements.

Table 26. DNS Dynamic Host Mapping

Field Description

Host Lists the host name that you assign to the specified IP address.

Total Amount of time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table.

Elapsed Amount of time since the dynamic entry was last updated.

Type The type of the dynamic entry.

Addresses Lists the IP address associated with the host name.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Note: If you attach a unit to a stack and its template does not match the

stack’s template, then the new unit automatically reboots using the

template used by the other stacking members. To avoid the automatic

reboot, first set the template to the SDM template used by existing

members of the stack. Then power off the new unit, attach it to the

stack, and power it on.

You can configure SDM template preferences for the switch.

 To configure the SDM Template Preference settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > DNS > SDM Template Preference

6. Use SDM Next Template ID to configure the next active template.

It is active only after the next reboot. To revert to the default template after the next

reboot, use the Default option. Possible values are as follows:

• Default

• IPv4 Data Center Plus Generic

• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Generic

• IPv4 Data Center Plus Native

• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Native

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Note: The templates with the Native keyword are supported only on the

M4300-24X24F and M4300-48X stand-alone switches and on a

homogenous stack of M4300-24X24F and M4300-48X switches.

The following table displays Summary information.

Configure Green Ethernet Settings

 To configure the Green Ethernet settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Table 27. SDM Template Preference Summary

Field Description

SDM Current Template ID The current active SDM template. Possible values are as follows:

• IPv4 Data Center Plus Generic

• IPv4 Data Center Plus Native

• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Generic

• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Native

SDM Template Identifies the template. The possible values are as follows:

• IPv4 Data Center Plus Generic

• IPv4 Data Center Plus Native

• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Generic

• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Native

ARP Entries The maximum number of entries in the IPv4 Address Resolution

Protocol (ARP) cache for routing interfaces.

IPv4 Unicast Routes The maximum number of IPv4 unicast forwarding table entries.

IPv6 NDP Entries The maximum number of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP)

cache entries.

IPv6 Unicast Routes The maximum number of IPv6 unicast forwarding table entries.

ECMP Next Hops The maximum number of next hops that can be installed in the IPv4

and IPv6 unicast forwarding tables.

IPv4 Multicast Routes The maximum number of IPv4 multicast forwarding table entries.

IPv6 Multicast Routes The maximum number of IPv6 multicast forwarding table entries.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Configuration.

6. Select the EEE mode Disable or Enable radio button. The factory default is enable.

Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC with a family of PHYs that support

operation in a low power mode. It is defined by IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Task

Force. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive sides of the link to disable

some functionality for power savings when lightly loaded. Transition to low power mode

does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not dropped or corrupted in

transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is transparent to upper layer

protocols and applications.

7. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings

 To configure the Green Ethernet interface settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Interface

Configuration.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:

• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on

the Go button.

• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to

configure

7. Use the Auto Power Down mode selection to enable or disable this option.

The factory default is Enable. When the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes

down for a short period of time, and then wakes up to check link pulses. This allows the

switch to perform autonegotiation and save power consumption when no link partner is

present.

8. Use the EEE mode menu to Enable or Disable this option.

The factory default is Disable. IF the EEE mode is not supported, then N/A is displayed.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Green Ethernet Local and Remote Devices

 To configure green Ethernet local and remote devices:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System

 Management  Green Ethernet  Green Ethernet Details.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.

7. Use the EEE Admin Mode selection to enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet Admin

Mode on the port. With EEE mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during a

link idle condition. The default value is Disabled. If EEE Admin Mode is not supported, then

N/A is displayed.

8. In the EEE Transmit Wake Time field, enter the time for which MAC/switch must wait to go

back to active state from LPI state when it receives a packet for transmission. The range is

8 to 65535. The default value is 17.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 28. Green Ethernet Local Device information

Field Description

Cumulative Energy Saved on this

port due to Green mode(s) (Watts

* Hours)

Cumulative energy saved due to all green modes enabled on this port

in (Watts * Hours).

Rx Low Power Idle Event Count This field is incremented each time MAC RX enters low-power idle

(LPI) state. Shows the total number of Rx LPI events since EEE

counters were last cleared.

Rx Low Power Idle Duration

(uSec)

This field indicates duration of Rx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows

the total duration of Rx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.

Tx Low Power Idle Event Count This field is incremented each time MAC TX enters LPI state. Shows

the total number of Tx LPI events since EEE counters were last

cleared.

Tx Low Power Idle Duration

(uSec)

This field indicates duration of Tx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows

the total duration of Tx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.

Tw_sys_tx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system can

support.

Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the remote system's Transmit Tw_sys that was

used by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it wants to

request from the remote system.

Tw_sys_rx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system

requests from the remote system.

Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the remote system’s Receive Tw_sys that was

used by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it can support.

Fallback Tw_sys (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the local system

requests from the remote system.

Tx_dll_enabled Data Link Layer Enabled: Initialization status of the EEE transmit Data

Link Layer management function on the local system.

Tx_dll_ready Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the tx system

initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU

containing EEE TLV.

Rx_dll_enabled Status of the EEE capability negotiation on the local system.

Rx_dll_ready Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the rx system

initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU

containing EEE TLV.

Time Since Counters Last Cleared Time Since Counters Last Cleared (since the time of power up, or after

EEE counters are cleared).

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Green Ethernet Remote Device Details

 To configure the Green Ethernet remote device information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System

 Management  Green Ethernet  Green Ethernet Details.

The Green Ethernet Details page displays.

6. Scroll down to the Remote Device Information section.

7. Select the Interface.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 29. Green Ethernet Remote Device Information

Field Description

Remote ID The remote client identifier assigned to the remote system.

Remote Tw_sys_tx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system can

support.

Remote Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Transmit Tw_sys echoed back by the

remote system.

Remote Tw_sys_rx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system

requests from the local system.

Remote Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Receive Tw_sys echoed back by the

remote system.

Remote Fallback Tw_sys (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the remote

system is advertising.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View the Green Ethernet Statistics Summary

 To view the green Ethernet statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System

 Management  Green Ethernet  Green Ethernet Summary.

6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 30. Green Ethernet Statistics Summary

Field Description

Current Power Consumption

/Stack (mWatts)

Power Consumption by all ports in switch in mWatts (mW).

Percentage Power Saving /Stack

(%)

Percentage of power saved on all ports in switch when Green mode is

enabled.

Cumulative Energy Saving /Stack

(Watts * Hours)

Cumulative energy saved per switch in (watts * hour) when all green

modes are enabled.

Table 31. Green Ethernet Feature Summary

Field Description

Unit The Unit ID.

Green Features supported on this

unit

List of green features supported on the given unit, which could be one

or more of the following:

• EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet)

• LPI-History (EEE Low Power Idle History)

• LLDP-Cap-Exchg (EEE LLDP Capability Exchange)

• Pwr-Usg-Est (Power Usage Estimates).

Interface Interface for which data is displayed or configured.

Energy Detect Admin mode Enable or disable Energy Detect mode on the port. When this mode is

enabled, when the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes down

for a short period of time, then wakes up to check link pulses. This

allows the switch to perform autonegotiation and save power

consumption when no link partner is present.

Energy Detect Operational Status Current operational status of the Energy Detect mode.

Short Reach Admin mode Enable or disable Short Reach Admin mode on the port. With Short

Reach mode enabled, PHY is forced to operate in low power mode

irrespective of the cable length.

Short Reach Operational Status Current operational status of the Short Reach mode.

EEE Admin mode Enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet mode on the port. With

EEE mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during link

idle conditions.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Configure the Green Ethernet EEE LPI History

 To configure the port Green Mode EEE history:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System

 Management  Green Ethernet  Green Ethernet LPI History.

Table 32. Green Ethernet Interface Summary

Field Description

Interface Interface for which data is displayed or configured.

EEE Admin mode Enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet mode on the port. When

EEE mode is enabled, the port transitions to Low Power mode during

Link Idle condition. If EEE Admin Mode is not supported, then N/A is

displayed.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Select the Interface.

7. In the Sampling Interval field, enter the interval at which EEE LPI data is collected.

This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 30 to 36000.The

default value is 3600.

8. In the Max Samples To Keep field, enter the maximum number of samples to keep.

This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 1 to 168.The default

value is 168.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Configure DHCP Server Settings

You can configure settings for DHCP server, DHCP pools, DHCP bindings, and DHCP relay.

You can also view DHCP statistics and conflicts.

Configure DHCP Server

 To configure a DHCP server:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

Table 33. Interface Green mode EEE LPI History

Field Description

Percentage LPI time per switch Time spent in LPI mode per switch since EEE counters were last

cleared.

Sample No. Sample index.

Time Since The Sample Was

Recorded

Each time the page is refreshed, it shows a different time as it reflects

the difference in current time and time at which the sample was

recorded.

Percentage Time spent in LPI

mode since last sample

Percentage of time spent in LPI mode during the current measurement

interval.

Percentage Time spent in LPI

mode since last reset

Percentage of time spent in LPI mode since EEE LPI statistics were

reset.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Server Configuration.

6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the DHCP service is enabled or disabled. The default value is

Disable.

7. Use Ping Packet Count to specify the number of packets a server sends to a pool address

to check for duplication as part of a ping operation.

The default value is 2. Valid range is 0, 2 to 10. Setting the value to 0 disables the

function.

8. Select the Conflict Logging mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether conflict logging on a DHCP server is to be enabled or disabled.

The default value is Enable.

9. Select the BootP Automatic mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether BootP for dynamic pools is to be enabled or disabled. The default

value is Disable.

10. To exclude addresses, do the following:

a. In the IP Range From field, enter the lowest address in the range or a single address

to be excluded.

b. In the IP Range To field, to exclude a range, enter the highest address in the range.

To exclude a single address, enter the same IP address as specified in the IP

Range From field, or leave it as 0.0.0.0.

11. Click the Add button.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The exclude addresses are added to the switch

12. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure the DHCP Pool

 To configure the DHCP pool:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Pool Configuration.

6. Click the Add button.

The pool configuration is added.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

7. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the DHCP Pool Configuration fields.

Table 34. DHCP Pool Configuration

Field Description

Pool Name* For a user with read/write permission, this field shows names of all the

existing pools along with an additional option Create. When the user

selects Create, another text box Pool Name, appears where the user

can enter a name for the pool to be created. For a user with read-only

permission, this field shows names of the existing pools only.

Pool Name The name of the pool to be created. This field appears when the user

with read-write permission selects Create in the Pool Name list*. Pool

Name can be up to 31 characters in length.

Type of Binding The type of binding for the pool:

• Unallocated

• Dynamic

• Manual

Network Address The subnet address for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool.

Network Mask The subnet number for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool. Either

Network Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the

subnet mask but not both.

Network Prefix Length The subnet number for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool. Either

Network Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the

subnet mask but not both. The valid range is 0 to 32.

Client Name The client name for DHCP manual pool.

Hardware Address The MAC address of the hardware platform of the DHCP client.

Hardware Address Type The protocol of the hardware platform of the DHCP client. Valid types

are Ethernet and ieee802. The default value is Ethernet.

Client ID The client identifier for DHCP manual pool.

Host Number The IP address for a manual binding to a DHCP client. The host can be

set only if f Client Identifier or Hardware Address is specified. Deleting

Host would delete the client name, client ID, and hardware address for

the manual pool, and set the pool type to Unallocated.

Host Mask The subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client. Either Host

Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask

but not both.

Host Prefix Length The subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client. Either Host

Mask or Prefix Length can be configured to specify the subnet mask

but not both. The valid range is 0 to 32.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure DHCP Pool Options

 To configure DHCP Pool options:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

Lease Time Can be selected as Infinite to specify lease time as Infinite or

Specified Duration to enter a specific lease period. In case of dynamic

binding infinite implies a lease period of 60 days and In case of manual

binding infinite implies indefinite lease period. The default value is

Specified Duration.

Days The number of days of the lease period. This field appears only if the

user specified Specified Duration as the Lease time. The default

value is 1. The valid range is 0 to 59.

Hours The number of hours of the lease period. This field appears only if the

user specified Specified Duration as the Lease time. The valid range

is 0 to 22.

Minutes The number of minutes of the lease period. This field appears only if

you specified Specified Duration as the lease time. The valid range is

0 to 86399.

Default Router Addresses The list of Default Router Addresses for the pool. Click the arrow

beside the field name to expand the page and display a table where

you can specify up to eight default router addresses in order of

preference.

DNS Server Addresses The list of DNS Server Addresses for the pool. Click the arrow beside

the field name to expand the page and display a table where you can

specify up to eight DNS Server Addresses in order of preference.

NetBIOS Name Server Addresses The list of NetBIOS Name Server Addresses for the pool. Click the

arrow beside the field name to expand the page and display a table

where you can specify up to eight NetBIOS name server addresses in

order of preference.

NetBIOS Node Type The NetBIOS node type for DHCP clients:

• b-node Broadcast

• p-node Peer-to-Peer

• m-node Mixed

• h-node Hybrid

Next Server Address The Next Server Address for the pool.

Domain Name The domain name for a DHCP client. Domain Name can be up to 255

characters in length.

Bootfile The name of the default boot image for a DHCP client. File Name can

be up to 128 characters in length.

Table 34. DHCP Pool Configuration (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server> DHCP Pool Options.

6. In Pool Name list, select the pool name.

7. Option Code specifies the Option Code configured for the selected Pool.

8. Use Option Type to specify the Option Type against the Option Code configured for the

selected pool:

• ASCII

• Hex

• IP Address

9. Option Value specifies the value against the Option Code configured for the selected pool.

10. Click the Add button.

The Option Code is added for the selected pool.

View DHCP Server Statistics

 To view the DHCP server statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Server Statistics.

The following table describes the DHCP Server Statistics fields.

Table 35. DHCP Server Statistics

Field Description

Automatic Bindings The number of automatic bindings on the DHCP Server.

Expired Bindings The number of expired bindings on the DHCP Server.

Malformed Messages The number of the malformed messages.

DHCPDISCOVER The number of DHCPDISCOVER messages received by the DHCP

Server.

DHCPREQUEST The number of DHCPREQUEST messages received by the DHCP

Server.

DHCPDECLINE The number of DHCPDECLINE messages received by the DHCP

Server.

DHCPRELEASE The number of DHCPRELEASE messages received by the DHCP

Server.

DHCPINFORM The number of DHCPINFORM messages received by the DHCP

Server.

DHCPOFFER The number of DHCPOFFER messages sent by the DHCP Server.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View DHCP Bindings Information

 To view the DHCP bindings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Bindings Information.

6. To display DHCP Bindings Information, select one of the following radio buttons:

• All Dynamic Bindings. Specify all dynamic bindings to be deleted.

• Specific Dynamic Binding. Specify specific dynamic binding to be deleted.

DHCPACK The number of DHCPACK messages sent by the DHCP Server.

DHCPNAK The number of DHCPNAK messages sent by the DHCP Server.

Table 35. DHCP Server Statistics (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the DHCP Bindings Information fields.

View DHCP Conflicts

You can view information on hosts with address conflicts, such as when the same IP address

is assigned to two or more devices on the network.

 To view the DHCP conflicts:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Conflicts Information.

Table 36. DHCP Bindings Information

Field Description

IP Address The client's IP address.

Hardware Address The client's hardware address.

Lease Time Left The Lease Time Left in Days, Hours and Minutes dd:hh:mm format.

Type The Type of Binding: Dynamic or Manual.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To display DHCP conflicts information, select one of the following radio buttons:

• All Address Conflicts. Specify all address conflicts to be deleted.

• Specific Address Conflict. Specify a specific dynamic binding to be deleted.

The following table describes the DHCP Conflicts Information fields.

Configure the DHCP Relay

 To configure DHCP relay:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP Relay.

Table 37. DHCP Conflicts Information

Field Description

IP Address The IP address of the host as recorded on the DHCP server.

Hardware Address The client’s hardware address.

Detection Method The manner in which the IP address of the hosts were found on the

DHCP server.

Detection Time The time when the conflict was detected in N days NNh:NNm:NNs

format with respect to the system up time.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use Maximum Hop Count to enter the maximum number of hops a client request can take

before being discarded.

The range is (1 to 16). The default value is 4.

7. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.

When you select Enable, DHCP requests are forwarded to the IP address you entered in

the Server Address field.

8. Use Minimum Wait Time to enter a Minimum Wait Time in seconds.

This value is compared to the time stamp in the client's request packets, which represents

the time since the client was powered up. Packets are forwarded only when the time

stamp exceeds the minimum wait time. The range is (0 to 100).

9. Select the Circuit ID Option mode Disable or Enable radio button.

If you select Enable, Relay Agent options are added to requests before they are

forwarded to the server and removed from replies before they are forwarded to clients.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the DHCP Relay Statistics fields.

Table 38. DHCP Relay Status

Field Description

Requests Received The total number of DHCP requests received from all clients since the

last time the switch was reset.

Requests Relayed The total number of DHCP requests forwarded to the server since the

last time the switch was reset.

Packets Discarded The total number of DHCP packets discarded by this Relay Agent since

the last time the switch was reset.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

DHCP L2 Relay

Configure Global DHCP L2 Relay Settings

 To configure global DHCP L2 Relay settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration.

6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.

For global configuration, this enables or disables the DHCP L2 Relay on the switch. The

default is Disable.

7. For VLAN configuration, VLAN ID shows the VLAN ID configured on the switch.

a. Use Admin mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected VLAN.

b. Use Circuit ID mode to enable or disable the Circuit ID suboption of DHCP

Option-82.

c. Use Remote ID String to specify the Remote ID when Remote ID mode is enabled.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The pagination navigation menu functions as follows:

- Rows per page. Select how many table entries are displayed per page. Possible

values are 20, 50, 100, 200, and All. If you select All, the browser might be slow to

display the information.

- <. Display the previous page of the table data entries.

- >. Display the next page of the table data entries.

Configure a DHCP L2 Relay Interface

 To configure DHCP L2 Relay:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration.

6. Use Admin mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected interface.

The default is Disable.

7. Use 82 Option Trust mode to enable or disable an interface to be trusted for DHCP L2

Relay (Option-82) received.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics

 To view the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics.

The following table describes the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics fields.

Table 39. DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics

Field Description

Interface Shows the interface from which the DHCP message is received.

UntrustedServerMsgsWithOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an

untrusted server.

UntrustedClientMsgsWithOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an

untrusted client.

TrustedServerMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a

trusted server.

TrustedClientMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a

trusted client.

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure UDP Relay Global Settings

 To configure UDP relay global settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > UDP Relay > UDP Relay Global Configuration.

6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables UDP Relay on the switch. The default value is Disable.

7. Use Server Address to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x.x.x.x format.

8. Use UDP Port to specify the UDP Destination Port.

These ports are supported:

• DefaultSet. Relay UDP port 0 packets. This is specified if no UDP port is selected

when creating the Relay server.

• dhcp. Relay DHCP (UDP port 67) packets.

• domain. Relay DNS (UDP port 53) packets.

• isakmp. Relay ISAKMP (UDP port 500) packets.

• mobile-ip. Relay Mobile IP (UDP port 434) packets

• nameserver. Relay IEN-116 Name Service (UDP port 42) packets

• netbios-dgm. Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server (UDP port 138) packets

• netbios-ns. Relay NetBIOS Name Server (UDP port 137) packets

Configure System Information

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

• ntp. Relay network time protocol (UDP port 123) packets.

• pim-auto-rp. Relay PIM auto RP (UDP port 496) packets.

• rip. Relay Routing Image Protocol (RIP) (UDP port 520) packets

• tacacs. Relay TACACS (UDP port 49) packet

• tftp. Relay TFTP (UDP port 69) packets

• time. Relay time service (UDP port 37) packets

• Other. If this option is selected, the UDP Port Other Value is enabled. This option

permits you to enter your own UDP port in UDP Port Other Value.

9. Use UDP Port Other Value to specify a UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and

65535.

10. Click the Add button.

An entry with the specified configuration is created in the UDP Relay Table.

11. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The Hit Count field displays the number of UDP packets that are detected on the UDP

port.

Configure UDP Relay Interface Settings

 To configure UDP Relay Interface settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > UDP Relay > UDP Relay Interface Configuration.

6. Use Interface to select an Interface to be enabled for the UDP Relay.

Configure System Information

100

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

7. Use Server Address to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x.x.x.x format.

8. Use UDP Port to specify UDP Destination Port.

The following ports are supported:

• DefaultSet. Relay UDP port 0 packets. This is specified if no UDP port is selected

when creating a Relay server.

• dhcp. Relay DHCP (UDP port 67) packets.

• domain. Relay DNS (UDP port 53) packets.

• isakmp. Relay ISAKMP (UDP port 500) packets.

• mobile-ip. Relay Mobile IP (UDP port 434) packets

• nameserver. Relay IEN-116 Name Service (UDP port 42) packets

• netbios-dgm. Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server (UDP port 138) packets

• netbios-ns. Relay NetBIOS Name Server (UDP port 137) packets

• ntp. Relay network time protocol (UDP port 123) packets.

• pim-auto-rp. Relay PIM auto RP (UDP port 496) packets.

• rip. Relay RIP (UDP port 520) packets

• tacacs. Relay TACACS (UDP port 49) packet

• tftp. Relay TFTP (UDP port 69) packets

• time. Relay time service (UDP port 37) packets

• Other. If this option is selected, the UDP Port Other Value is enabled. This option

permits the user to enter their own UDP port in UDP Port Other Value.

9. Use UDP Port Other Value to specify UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and 65535.

10. Use Discard to enable/disable dropping of matched packets.

Enable can be chosen only when a user enters 0.0.0.0 IP address. Discard mode can be

set to Disable when user adds a new entry with a non-zero IP address.

11. Click the Add button.

An entry with the specified configuration is created in the UDP Relay Table.

12. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The Hit Count field displays the number of UDP packets that are detected on the UDP

port.

Configure System Information

101

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Manage the DHCPv6 Server

Enable or Disable the DHCPv6 Server

You can configure the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) server

settings on the device. The device can act as a DHCPv6 server or DHCPv6 relay agent to

help assign network configuration information to IPv6 clients.

 To enable or disable DHCP service:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Server Configuration.

6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the DHCPv6 Service administrative mode is enabled or disabled

The default value is Disable.

7. Use the DHCPv6 Server DUID field to specify the DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) of the

DHCPv6 server.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

102

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure the DHCPv6 Pool

You can view the currently configured DHCPv6 server pools as well as to add and remove

pools. A DHCPv6 server pool is a set of network configuration information available to

DHCPv6 clients that request the information.

 To configure DHCPv6 pool settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Pool Configuration.

The Pool Name field shows the names of all the existing pools and the Create option.

Note: If you are logged in as a user with read-only permission, the Pool

Name field displays only the existing pool names. To create a pool, you

must log in with the admin user name, which has read/write

permissions.

6. To create a pool, select Create, and enter a unique name that identifies the DHCPv6 server

pool to be created.

The name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters in length.

Configure System Information

103

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

7. Use the Default Router Addresses field to specify the list of default router addresses for

the pool.

The user can specify up to eight default router addresses in order of preference.

8. User the Domain Name field to specify the domain name for a DHCPv6 client in the pool.

The domain name can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters in length.

To delete the selected pool on the switch, click the Delete button.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure the DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation

 To configure the DHCPv6 Prefix delegation settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation

Configuration.

6. Select from the list of configured Pool Names.

7. In the Prefix and Prefix Length fields, specify the delegated IPv6 prefix.

8. In the DUID field, specify the DUID identifier used to identify the client’s unique DUID value.

9. Specify the Client Name, which is useful for logging or tracing only.

The name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters.

10. Specify the Valid Lifetime in seconds for the delegated prefix.

Valid values are 0 to 4294967295.

11. Specify the Prefer Lifetime in seconds for the delegated prefix.

Valid values are 0 to 4294967295.

Configure System Information

104

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

12. Click the Add button.

The delegated prefix is added for the selected pool.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure DHCPv6 Interface Settings

You can configure the per-interface settings for DHCPv6. The DHCPv6 interface modes are

mutually exclusive. The fields that can be configured on this page depend on the selected

mode for the interface.

 To configure DHCPv6 Interface settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Interface Configuration.

6. Select the Interface with the information to view or configure. You can either:

a. In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go

button. The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.

b. Select the check box from the list of Interfaces configured for DHCPv6 server

functionality.

Configure System Information

105

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

7. In the Admin mode list, select to Enable or Disable DHCPv6 mode to configure server

functionality.

DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay functions are mutually exclusive.

8. In the Pool Name field, specify the DHCPv6 pool containing stateless and/or prefix

delegation parameters.

9. Rapid Commit is an optional parameter. In the Rapid Commit list, select to Enable or

Disable allowing an abbreviated exchange between the client and server.

10. In the Preference field, specify the preference value used by clients to determine the

preference between DHCPv6 servers.

Valid values are 0 to 4294967295. The default value is 0.

11. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View DHCPv6 Bindings Information

You can view entries in the DHCP Bindings table. After a client acquires IPv6 configuration

information from the DHCPv6 server, the server adds an entry to its database. The entry is

called a binding.

 To view DHCPv6 bindings information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Bindings Information.

Configure System Information

106

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields that are displayed.

Table 40. DHCPv6 Binding Information

Field Description

Client Address The IPv6 address of the client associated with the binding.

Client Interface The interface number where the client binding occurred.

Client DUID The DHCPv6 Unique Identifier (DUID) of the client. The DUID is a

combination of the client’s hardware address and client identifier.

Prefix The IPv6 address for the delegated prefix associated with this

binding.

Prefix Length The IPv6 mask length for the delegated prefix associated with this

binding.

Prefix Type The type of IPv6 prefix associated with this binding.

Expiry Time The number of seconds until the prefix associated with a binding

expires.

Valid Lifetime The maximum amount of time in seconds that the client is allowed

to use the prefix.

Prefer Lifetime The preferred amount of time in seconds that the client is allowed

to use the prefix.

Configure System Information

107

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View DHCPv6 Server Statistics

You can view the DHCPv6 server statistics for the device, including information about the

DHCPv6 messages, sent, received, and discarded globally and on each interface. The

values on the page indicate the various counts that accumulated since they were last

cleared.

 To view DHCPv6 server statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Server Statistics.

Configure System Information

108

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To view detailed DHCPv6 statistics for an interface, from the Interface list select the entry

for which data is to be displayed.

If you select All, data is shown for all interfaces.

7. To reset the DHCPv6 counters for one or more interface, select each interface with the

statistics to reset and click the Clear button.

8. To refresh the page, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields that are displayed.

Table 41. DHCPv6 Server Statistics

Field Description

Messages Received The aggregate of all interface level statistics for received messages.

Total DHCPv6 Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 messages received on the interface. The

DHCPv6 messages sent from a DHCP v6 client to a DHCP v6 server

include solicit, request, confirm, renew, rebind, release, decline, and

information-request messages. Additionally, a DHCP v6 relay agent can

forward relay-forward messages to a DHCP v6 server.

DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Solicit messages received on the interface. This

type of message is sent by a client to locate DHCPv6 servers.

DHCPv6 Request Packets Received The number of requests.

DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Confirm messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to all DHCPv6 servers to

determine whether its configuration is valid for the connected link.

DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Renew messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to extend and update the

configuration information provided by the DHCPv6 server.

DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Rebind messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to any DHCPv6 server when it

does not receive a response to a Renew message.

DHCPv6 Release Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Release messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to indicate that it no longer

needs the assigned address.

DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Decline messages received on the interface.

This type of message is sent by a client to the DHCPv6 server to

indicate that an assigned address is already in use on the link.

DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received The number of DHCP v6 information-request messages received on the

interface. This type of message is sent by a client to request

configuration information other than IP address assignment.

DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets

Received

The number of DHCPv6 relay-forward messages received on the

interface. This type of message is sent by a relay agent to forward

messages to servers.

Configure System Information

109

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure DHCPv6 Relay for an Interface

 To configure DHCPv6 Relay for an interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets

Received

The number of DHCP v6 relay-reply messages received on the

interface. This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCP v6 relay

agent and contains the message for the relay agent to deliver to the

client.

DHCPv6 Malformed Packets

Received

The number of DHCPv6 messages that were received on the interface

but were dropped because they were malformed.

Received DHCPv6 Packets

Discarded

The number of Packets Discarded.

Messages Sent The aggregate of all interface level statistics for messages sent.

Total DHCPv6 Packets Sent The number of DHCPv6 messages sent by the interface. The DHCPv6

messages sent from a DHCPv6 server to a DHCPv6 client include

Advertise, Reply, Reconfigure, and Relay-Reply messages.

DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets

Transmitted

The number of DHCPv6 Advertise messages sent by the interface. This

type of message is sent by a server to a DHCPv6 client in response to a

Solicit message and indicates that it is available for service.

DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted The number of DHCPv6 Reply messages sent from the interface to a

DHCPv6 client in response to a solicit, request, renew, rebind,

information-request, confirm, release, or decline message.

DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets

Transmitted

The number of DHCPv6 reconfigure messages sent by the interface.

This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCPv6 client to inform

the client that the server has new or updated information. The client then

typically initiates a renew/reply or Information-request/reply transaction

with the server to receive the updated information.

DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets

Transmitted

The number of DHCPv6 Relay-Forward messages sent by the interface.

This type of message is sent by a relay agent to forward messages to

servers.

DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets

Transmitted

The number of DHCPv6 Relay-Reply messages sent by the interface.

This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCPv6 relay agent and

contains the message for the relay agent to deliver to the client.

Table 41. DHCPv6 Server Statistics (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

110

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Relay.

6. Select the Interface with the information to view or configure.

You take one of the following actions:

• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go

button. The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.

• Select the check box from the list of Interfaces configured for DHCPv6 Relay

functionality.

7. In the Admin mode field, specify the DHCPv6 mode, either Enable or Disable, to configure

DHCPv6 Relay functionality.

The default is Disable. DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay functions are mutually

exclusive.

8. From the Relay Interface list, select an interface to reach a relay server.

9. In the Destination IP Address, specify an IPv6 address to reach a relay server.

10. In the Remote ID field, specify the relay agent information option.

The remote ID is derived from the DHCPv6 server DUID and the relay interface number,

or it can be specified as a user-defined string.

11. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

111

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure PoE

Configure Basic PoE

Note: PoE is supported on models M4200-10MG-PoE+, M4300-28G-POE+,

and M4300-52G-POE+ only.

 To configure basic PoE settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > PoE > Basic > PoE Configuration.

The Unit Selection field displays the current PoE unit.

6. To change the PoE unit, select another unit from the list.

7. To set the System Usage Threshold percentage, enter a number from 1 to 99.

This sets the threshold level at which a trap is sent if consumed power is greater than the

threshold power.

8. The Power Management mode describes or controls the power management algorithm

used by the PSE to deliver power to the requesting PDs.

Select Static to indicate that the power allocated for each port depends on the type of

power threshold configured on the port. Select Dynamic to indicate that the power

consumption on each port is measured and calculated in real-time.

9. To set the traps, select Enable to activate the PoE traps.

Select Disable to deactivate the PoE traps. The default setting is enabled.

10. Click the Apply button.

Configure System Information

112

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the PoE Configuration nonconfigurable fields.

Configure PoE Settings

 To configure PoE settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Configuration.

Table 42. PoE Configuration Nonconfigurable Fields

Field Description

Units The Current PoE Unit. You can change the PoE Unit by selecting

another unit ID listed here.

Model The model of the PoE card.

Host The PoE host.

Firmware Version The firmware version of the PoE software component.

Power Status Indicates the power status.

Total Power (Main AC) The total power provided by the MAIN AC power source.

Total Power (RPS) The total power provided by the redundant power source.

Power Source Current source of system power (Main AC or RPS).

Threshold Power System can power up one port, if consumed power is less than this

power. Consumed power can be between Nominal & Threshold Power

values. The threshold power value is determined by the configurable

System Usage Threshold percent.

Consumed Power Total amount of power in watts currently being consumed by connected

PoE devices.

Configure System Information

113

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The Unit Selection field displays the current PoE unit.

6. To change the PoE unit, select another unit from the list.

7. To set the System Usage Threshold percentage, enter a number from 1 to 99.

This sets the threshold level at which a trap is sent if consumed power is greater than the

threshold power.

8. The Power Management mode is the method by which the PoE controller determines

supplied power, which can be one of the following:

• Select Static to indicate that the power allocated for each is reserved and is not

available to any other port, even when less than the maximum allocation is being

used.

• Select Dynamic to indicate that the power consumption on each port is measured

and calculated in real-time. The power allocated to each port is not reserved. Unused

power may be allocated from one port to another as needed, up to the power limit

defined for each port.

9. To set the traps, select Enable to activate the PoE traps.

Select Disable to deactivate the PoE traps. The default setting is enabled.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the PoE Configuration nonconfigurable fields.

Table 43. PoE Configuration

Field Description

Units The current PoE Unit. You can change the PoE Unit by selecting

another unit ID listed here.

Firmware Version The version of the PoE controller's FW image.

Power Status Indicates the power status.

Total Power (Main AC) The total power provided by the MAIN AC power source.

Total Power (RPS)

Total Power (PD) for GSM5212P

switches only

The total power provided by the redundant power source.

Power Source Current source of system power (Main AC or RPS).

Configure System Information

114

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure PoE Ports

 To configure PoE port settings:,

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration.

6. Select the Admin mode (Enable or Disable) to determine the ability of the port to deliver

power.

7. Port Priority is used to determine which ports can deliver power when the total power

delivered by the system crosses a specific threshold.

If the switch cannot supply power to all connected devices, the priority determines which

ports can supply power. The lowest numbered ports with the same Port Priority setting

are given higher priority. Select the priority order from the following list:

• Low. Low priority

• Medium. Medium priority

• High. High priority

• Critical. Critical priority

Threshold Power System can power up one port, if consumed power is less than this

power. i.e. Consumed power can be between Nominal and Threshold

Power values. The threshold power value is effected by changing

System Usage Threshold.

Consumed Power Total amount of a power which is currently being delivered to all ports.

Table 43. PoE Configuration (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

115

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

8. Select the High Power mode from the following options:

• Disabled indicates that a port is powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode.

• Legacy indicates that a port is powered using high-inrush current, used by legacy

PD's whose power requirements are more than 15W from power up.

• Pre-802.3at indicates a port is powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode initially and then

switched to the high-power IEEE 802.3at mode before 75 msec. This mode must be

selected if the PD is NOT performing Layer 2 Classification or the PSE is performing

2-Event Layer 1 Classification.

• 802.3at indicates that a port is powered in the IEEE 802.3at mode. For example, if the

class detected by PSE is not class4, then the PSE port does not power up the PD.

• upoe indicates that a port is powered in the UPoE mode.

9. The Power Limit Type describes or controls the maximum power that a port can deliver.

Select the type from the following list:

• Class indicates that the port power limit is equal to the class of the PD attached.

• User indicates that the port power limit is equal to the value specified by Power Limit.

• None indicates that the port draws up to class 0 maximum power in low power mode

and up to class 4 maximum power in high power mode.

10. Select the Power Limit to define the maximum power (in watts) which can be delivered by

a port.

The maximum allowed power limit is 60000 mW per port.

11. The Detection Type Describes a PD detection mechanism performed by the PSE port.

• pre-ieee. Only legacy detection is done.

• ieee. 4 Point Resistive Detection is done.

• auto. 4 Point Resistive Detection followed by Legacy Detection is done.

• 4point and Legacy indicates that the resistive 4 point detection scheme is used and

when it fails to detect a connected PD, legacy capacitive detection is used.

12. The Timer Schedule defines the timer schedule assigned to the port. Select None to

remove the timer schedule assignment.

13. Click Reset to forcibly reset the PSE port.

14. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the PoE Configuration nonconfigurable fields.

Table 44. PoE Configuration

Field Description

Port The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

High Power Enabled when particular port supports High Power mode.

Max Power The maximum power in Watts that can be provided by the port.

Configure System Information

116

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure SNMP

You can configure SNMP settings for SNMP V1/V2 and SNMPv3.

Configure the SNMP V1/V2 Community

By default, two SNMP communities exist:

• Private, with read/write privileges and status set to Enable.

• Public, with read-only privileges and status set to Enable.

These are well-known communities. You can change the defaults or to add other

communities. Only the communities that you define can access to the switch using the SNMP

Class The Class defines the range of power a PD is drawing from the system.

Class definitions:

0 – 0.44-12.95 (watts)

1 – 0.44-3.83 (watts)

2 – 0.44-6.48 (watts)

3 – 0.44-12.95 (watts)

4 – 0.44-25.5 (watts)

Output Voltage Current voltage being delivered to device in volts.

Output Current Current being delivered to device in mA.

Output Power Current power being delivered to device in Watts.

Status The status is the operational status of the port PD detection.

• Disabled. No power being delivered.

• DeliveringPower. Power is being drawn by device.

• Fault. Indicates a problem with the port.

• Test. The port is in test mode.

• otherFault. The port is idle due to error condition.

• Searching. The port is not in one of the above states.

Fault Status Describes the error description when the PSE port is in fault status.

• No Error. The PSE port is not in any error state.

• MPS Absent. The PSE port has detected an absence of main

power supply.

• Short. The PSE port has detected a short circuit condition.

• Overload.The PD connected to the PSE port tried to provide more

power than it is permissible by the hardware.

• Power Denied. The PSE port was denied power because of

shortage of power or due to administrative action.

Table 44. PoE Configuration (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

117

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

V1 and SNMP V2 protocols. Only those communities with read/write level access can be

used to change the configuration using SNMP.

Note: If you want to use SNMP v3, use the User Accounts menu.

 To configure the SNMP V1/V2 community:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration.

6. Use Community Name to reconfigure an existing community, or to create a new one.

Use this menu to select one of the existing community names, or select 'Create' to add a

new one. A valid entry is a case-sensitive string of up to 16 characters.

7. Client Address. Taken together, the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of

IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to access this device.

If either (Client Address or IP Mask) value is 0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP

address. Otherwise, every client's address is ANDed with the mask, as is the Client

Address, and, if the values are equal, access is allowed. For example, if the Client

Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, then any client

whose address is 192.168.1.0 through 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To

allow access from only one station, use a Client IP Mask value of 255.255.255.255, and

use that machine's IP address for Client Address.

8. Client IP Mask. Taken together, the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of IP

addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to access this device.

If either (Client Address or IP Mask) value is 0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP

address. Otherwise, every client's address is ANDed with the mask, as is the Client

Configure System Information

118

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Address, and, if the values are equal, access is allowed. For example, if the Client

Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, then any client

whose IP address is 192.168.1.0 through 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To

allow access from only one station, use a Client IP Mask value of 255.255.255.255, and

use that machine's IP address for Client Address.

9. In the Access mode menu, select Read-Write or Read-Only.

This specifies the access level for this community.

10. Use Status to specify the status of this community by selecting Enable or Disable.

If you select enable, the Community Name must be unique among all valid Community

Names or the set request are rejected. If you select disable, the Community Name

becomes invalid.

11. Click the Add button.

The selected community is added to the switch.

Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Settings

 To configure the SNMP V1/V2 trap settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration.

6. In the Source Interface list, select the source interface to use for SNMP Trap receiver.

Configure System Information

119

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Possible values are as follows:

• Routing interface

• Routing VLAN

• Routing loopback interface

• Tunnel interface

• Service port

VLAN 1 is used as source interface by default.

7. To add a host that receives SNMP traps, do the following steps:

a. Community Name. Enter the community string for the SNMP trap packet to be sent to

the trap manager. This name can be up to 16 characters and is case-sensitive.

b. Version. Select the trap version to be used by the receiver:

• SNMP V1. Uses SNMP V1 to send traps to the receiver.

• SNMP V2. Uses SNMP V2 to send traps to the receiver.

c. Protocol. Select the protocol to be used by the receiver. Select IPv4 if the receiver's

address is IPv4 address or IPv6 if the receiver's address is IPv6.

d. Address. Enter the IPv4 address in x.x.x.x format or the IPv6 address in

xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx to receive SNMP traps from this device.

The length of the address cannot exceed 39 characters.

e. Status. Select the receiver's status:

• Enable. Send traps to the receiver

• Disable. Do not send traps to the receiver.

f. Click the Add button.

8. To make changes, do the following:

• To modify information about an existing SNMP recipient, select the check box for the

recipient, and change the desired fields.

• To delete a recipient, select the check box for the recipient and click the Delete

button.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

120

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Flags

You can enable or disable traps. When the condition identified by an active trap is

encountered by the switch, a trap message is sent to any enabled SNMP Trap Receivers,

and a message is written to the trap log.

 To configure the trap flags:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Flags.

Configure System Information

121

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Select the Authentication Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables activation of authentication failure traps. The factory default is

Enable.

7. Select the Link Up/Down Disable or Enable radio button

This enables or disables activation of link status traps.The factory default is Enable.

8. Select the Multiple Users Disable or Enable radio button

This enables or disables activation of multiple user traps.The factory default is Enable.

This trap is triggered when the same user ID is logged into the switch more than once at

the same time (either through Telnet or the serial port).

9. Select the Spanning Tree Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables activation of spanning tree traps. The factory default is Enable.

10. Select the ACL Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables activation of ACL traps. The factory default is Disable.

11. Select the PoE Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables activation of PoE traps. The factory default is Enable. Indicates

whether PoE traps are sent.

12. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View the Supported MIBs

 To view all the MIBs supported by the switch:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 >Supported MIBs.

Configure System Information

122

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the SNMP Supported MIBs Status fields.

Configure SNMP V3 Users

 To configure SNMPv3 settings for the user account:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V3 > User Configuration.

Table 45. SNMP Supported MIBs

Field Description

Name The RFC number if applicable and the name of the MIB.

Description The RFC title or MIB description.

Configure System Information

123

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. In the User Name list, select the user account to be configured.

The SNMP v3 Access mode field indicates the SNMPv3 access privileges for the user

account. The admin account has read/write access, and all other accounts are assigned

read-only access.

7. Select an Authentication Protocol radio button.

The valid Authentication Protocols are None, MD5 or SHA:

• If you select None, the user cannot access the SNMP data from an SNMP browser.

• If you select MD5 or SHA, the user login password are used as the SNMPv3

authentication password, and you must therefore specify a password, and it must be

eight characters long.

This specifies the SNMPv3 Authentication Protocol setting for the selected user account.

8. Select a Encryption Protocol radio button.

The valid Encryption Protocols are None or DES:

• If you select the DES Protocol you must enter a key in the Encryption Key field.

• If None is specified for the Protocol, the Encryption Key is ignored.

This specifies the SNMPv3 Encryption Protocol setting for the selected user account.

9. If you selected DES in the Encryption Protocol field, enter the encryption key in the

SNMPv3 Encryption Key field.

If you did not select DES, this field is ignored. Valid keys are 0 to 15 characters long.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

124

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure LLDP

The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations

on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. This information is

viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on

the LAN.

LLDP is a one-way protocol; there are no request/response sequences. Information is

advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by

stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be

enabled/disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on

all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine

appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an

enhancement to LLDP with the following features:

• Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority, and DiffServ settings),

enabling plug and play networking.

• Device location discovery for creation of location databases.

• Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.

• Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices

and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions,

serial/asset number).

Configure LLDP Global Settings

You can specify LLDP parameters that are applied to the switch.

 To configure global LLDP settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Configure System Information

125

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select System > LLDP > Global Configuration.

6. In the Transmit Interval field, enter the interval in seconds to transmit LLDP frames.

The range is from 5 to 32768 secs. The default value is 30 seconds.

7. In the Transmit Hold Multiplier field, enter the multiplier on Transmit Interval to assign TTL.

The range is from 2 to 10 secs. The default value is 4.

8. In the Re-Initialization Delay field, enter the delay before re-initialization.

The range is from 1 to 10 secs. The default value is 2 seconds.

9. In the Notification Interval field, enter the interval in seconds for transmission of

notifications.

The range is from 5 to 3600 secs. The default value is 5 seconds.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure the LLDP Interface

 To configure the LLDP interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Configure System Information

126

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select System > LLDP > Interface Configuration.

6. Use Go To Port to enter the Port in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.

The entry corresponding to the specified Port, is selected.

7. Use Port to specify the list of ports on which LLDP - 802.1AB can be configured.

The Link Status field indicates whether the link is up or down.

8. Use Transmit to specify the LLDP - 802.1AB transmit mode for the selected interface.

9. Use Receive to specify the LLDP - 802.1AB receive mode for the selected interface.

10. Use Notify to specify the LLDP - 802.1AB notification mode for the selected interface.

11. Optional TLV(s):

• Use Port Description to include port description TLV in LLDP frames.

• Use System Name to include system name TLV in LLDP frames.

• Use System Description to include system description TLV in LLDP frames.

• Use System Capabilities to include system capability TLV in LLDP frames.

12. Use Transmit Management Information to specify whether management address is

transmitted in LLDP frames for the selected interface.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View LLDP Statistics

 To view LLDP statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Configure System Information

127

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Statistics.

The following table describes the LLDP Statistics fields.

Table 46. LLDP Statistics

Field Description

Last Update The time when an entry was created, modified or deleted in the tables

associated with the remote system.

Total Inserts The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a

particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was inserted into tables

associated with the remote systems.

Total Deletes The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a

particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was deleted from tables

associated with the remote systems.

Total Drops The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a

particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) could not be entered into

tables associated with the remote systems because of insufficient

resources.

Total Age outs The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a

particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was deleted from tables

associated with the remote systems because the information timeliness

interval has expired.

Interface The unit/slot/port for the interfaces.

Transmit Total The number of LLDP frames transmitted by the LLDP agent on the

corresponding port.

Receive Total The number of valid LLDP frames received by this LLDP agent on the

corresponding port, while the LLDP agent is enabled.

Configure System Information

128

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View LLDP Local Device Information

 To view LLDP local device information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Local Device Information.

Discards The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent

on the corresponding port.

Errors The number of invalid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on the

corresponding port, while the LLDP agent is enabled.

Age outs The number of age-outs that occurred on a given port. An age-out is

the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a

particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was deleted from tables

associated with the remote entries because information timeliness

interval expired.

TLV Discards The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent

on the corresponding port.

TLV Unknowns The number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which were not

recognized by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port.

TLV MED The total number of LLDP-MED TLVs received on the local ports.

TLV 802.1 The total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of

type 802.1.

TLV 802.3 The total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of

type 802.3.

Table 46. LLDP Statistics (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

129

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. In Interface list, select the ports on which LLDP - 802.1AB frames can be transmitted.

The following table describes the LLDP Local Device Information fields.

Table 47. LLDP Local Device Information

Field Description

Chassis ID Subtype The string that describes the source of the switch identifier.

Chassis ID The string value used to identify the switch component associated with

the local system.

Port ID Subtype The string that describes the source of the port identifier.

Port ID The string that describes the source of the port identifier.

System Name The system name of the local system.

System Description The description of the selected port associated with the local system.

Port Description The description of the selected port associated with the local system.

System Capabilities Supported The system capabilities of the local system.

System Capabilities Enabled The system capabilities of the local system which are supported and

enabled.

Management Address Type The type of the management address.

Management Address The advertised management address of the local system.

Configure System Information

130

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View LLDP Remote Device Information

You can view information on remote devices connected to the port.

 To view LLDP remote device information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > Remote Device Information.

6. Use Interface to select the local ports which can receive LLDP frames.

The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Information fields.

Table 48. LLDP Remote Device Information

Field Description

Remote ID The remote ID.

Switch ID The switch component associated with the remote system.

Switch ID Subtype The source of the switch identifier.

Port ID The port component associated with the remote system.

Port ID Subtype The source of port identifier.

System Name The system name of the remote system.

System Description The description of the given port associated with the remote system.

Port Description The description of the given port associated with the remote system.

System Capabilities Supported The system capabilities of the remote system.

Configure System Information

131

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View LLDP Remote Device Inventory

 To view LLDP remote device inventory:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP > Remote Device Inventory.

The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Inventory fields.

System Capabilities Enabled The system capabilities of the remote system which are supported and

enabled.

Time to Live The Time To Live value in seconds of the received remote entry.

Management Address Type The type of the management address.

Management Address • Management Address. The advertised management address of the

remote system.

• Type. The type of the management address.

Table 49. LLDP Remote Device Inventory

Field Description

Port The list of all the ports on which LLDP frame is enabled.

Remote Device ID The remote device ID.

Management Address The advertised management address of the remote system.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with the remote system.

Table 48. LLDP Remote Device Information (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

132

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure LLDP-MED Global Settings

You can specify LLDP-MED parameters that are applied to the switch.

 To configure LLDP-MED global settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Global Configuration.

6. In the Fast Start Repeat Count field, enter the number of LLDP PDUs that are transmitted

when the protocol is enabled.

The range is from (1 to 10). Default value of fast repeat count is 3.

The Device Class field specifies local device's MED classification. There are four

different kinds of devices, three of them represent the actual end points (classified as

Class I Generic [IP Communication Controller and so on], Class II Media [Conference

Bridge and so on], Class III Communication [IP Telephone and so on]). The fourth device

is Network Connectivity Device, which is typically a LAN Switch/Router, IEEE 802.1

Bridge, IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point and so on.

7. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

System Name Specifies model name of the remote device.

Remote Port ID The port component associated with the remote system.

Table 49. LLDP Remote Device Inventory (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

133

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure LLDP-MED Interface

 To configure LLDP-MED Interface

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Interface Configuration.

The Link Status field displays the link status of the port (up or down).

The Operational Status field displays whether the LLDP-MED TLVs are transferred on

this interface.

6. Use Go To Port to enter the Port in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.

The entry corresponding to the specified Port, is selected.

7. Use Interface to specify the list of ports on which LLDP-MED - 802.1AB can be configured.

8. Use MED Status to specify whether LLDP-MED mode is enabled or disabled on this

interface.

9. Use Notification Status to specify the LLDP-MED topology notification mode of the

interface.

10. Use Transmit Type Length Values to specify which optional type length values (TLVs) in

the LLDP-MED is transmitted in the LLDP PDUs frames for the selected interface:

• MED Capabilities. To transmit the capabilities TLV in LLDP frames.

• Network Policy. To transmit the network policy TLV in LLDP frames.

• Location Identification. To transmit the location TLV in LLDP frames.

• Extended Power via MDI - PSE. To transmit the extended PSE TLV in LLDP frames.

Configure System Information

134

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

• Extended Power via MDI - PD. To transmit the extended PD TLV in LLDP frames.

• Inventory Information. To transmit the inventory TLV in LLDP frames.

11. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View LLDP-MED Local Device Information

 To view LLDP-MED local device information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Local Device Information.

Configure System Information

135

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use Interface to select the ports on which LLDP-MED frames can be transmitted.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED Local Device Information fields.L

View LLDP-MED Remote Device Information

 To view LLDP-MED remote device information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Table 50. LDP-MED Local Device Information

Field Description

Network Policy Information: Specifies if network policy TLV is present in the LLDP frames.

Media Application Type The application type. Types of application types are unknown,

voicesignaling, guestvoice, guestvoicesignalling, softphonevoice,

videoconferencing, streammingvideo, vidoesignalling.

Each application type that is received has the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP,

tagged bit status and unknown bit status. A port can receive one or

many such application types.

If a network policy TLV was transmitted, only then would this

information be displayed

Inventory: Specifies if inventory TLV is present in LLDP frames

Hardware Revision Specifies hardware version.

Firmware Revision Specifies Firmware version.

Software Revision Specifies Software version.

Serial Number Specifies serial number.

Manufacturer Name Specifies manufacturers name.

Model Name Specifies model name.

Asset ID Specifies asset ID.

Location Information: Specifies if location TLV is present in LLDP frames.

Sub Type Specifies type of location information.

Location Information The location information as a string for given type of location ID.

Configure System Information

136

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Remote Device Information.

6. Use Interface to select the ports on which LLDP-MED is enabled.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED Remote Device Information fields.

Table 51. LLDP-MED Remote Device Information

Field Description

Capability Information: The supported and enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on

this port.

Supported Capabilities Specifies supported capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this

port.

Enabled Capabilities Specifies enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this

port.

Device Class Specifies device class as advertised by the device remotely connected

to the port.

Network Policy Information: Specifies if network policy TLV is received in the LLDP frames on this

port.

Configure System Information

137

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Media Application Type The application type. Types of application types are unknown,

voicesignaling, guestvoice, guestvoicesignalling, softphonevoice,

videoconferencing, streammingvideo, vidoesignalling. Each

application type that is received has the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP,

tagged bit status and unknown bit status. A port can receive one or

many such application types. If a network policy TLV was received on

this port, only then would this information be displayed.

VLAN Id The VLAN ID associated with a particular policy type.

Priority The priority associated with a particular policy type.

DSCP The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.

Unknown Bit Status The unknown bit associated with a particular policy type.

Tagged Bit Status The tagged bit associated with a particular policy type.

Inventory Information: Specifies if inventory TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.

Hardware Revision Specifies hardware version of the remote device.

Firmware Revision Specifies Firmware version of the remote device.

Software Revision Specifies Software version of the remote device.

Serial Number Specifies serial number of the remote device.

Manufacturer Name Specifies manufacturers name of the remote device.

Model Name Specifies model name of the remote device.

Asset ID Specifies asset ID of the remote device.

Location Information: Specifies if location TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.

Sub Type Specifies type of location information.

Location Information The location information as a string for given type of location ID.

Extended POE: Specifies if remote device is a PoE device.

Device Type Specifies remote device's PoE device type connected to this port.

Extended POE PSE: Specifies if extended PSE TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port

Available The remote ports PSE power value in tenths of watts.

Source The remote ports PSE power source.

Priority The remote ports PSE power priority.

Extended POE PD: Specifies if extended PD TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port.

Required The remote port's PD power requirement.

Table 51. LLDP-MED Remote Device Information (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

138

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory

 To view LLDP-MED remote device inventory:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Remote Device Inventory.

The following table describes the LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory fields.

Source The remote port's PD power source.

Priority The remote port's PD power priority.

Table 52. LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory

Field Definition

Port The list of all the ports on which LLDP-MED is enabled.

Management Address The advertised management address of the remote system.

MAC Address The MAC address associated with the remote system.

System Model Specifies model name of the remote device.

Software Revision Specifies Software version of the remote device.

Table 51. LLDP-MED Remote Device Information (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

139

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Link Dependency

The link dependency feature provides the ability to enable or disable one or more ports

based on the link state of one or more different ports. With link dependency enabled on a

port, the link state of that port is dependent on the link state of another port. For example, if

port A is dependent on port B and the switch detects a link loss on port B, the switch

automatically brings down the link on port A. When the link is restored to port B, the switch

automatically restores the link to port A.

Configure Link Dependency Group

 To configure a link dependency group:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Link Dependency > Link Dependency Group Configuration.

6. Select the Group ID option for which data is to be displayed. The range for Group ID is 1 to

16.

7. From the Link Action list, specify the action to be performed on the downstream interfaces

when all the interfaces in the upstream list go down. The default value is Link Down.

a. Link Down — When all the upstream interfaces are down, then all the downstream

interfaces are brought down. When any of the upstream interfaces are up, then all the

downstream interfaces are brought up.

b. Link Up — When all the upstream interfaces are down, then all the downstream

interfaces are brought up. When any of the upstream interfaces are up, then all the

downstream interfaces are brought down.

8. Click the Apply button.

Configure System Information

140

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure a Link Dependency Interface

 To configure a link dependency interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Link Dependency > Link Dependency Interface Configuration.

6. In the Link Dependency Group ID section of the page, use the Group ID menu to select the

Group ID for which you want to display or configure data.

The range for Group ID is 1 to 16.

7. To make changes, do the following:

• Click the Clear button to clear all interfaces from the specified group.

• Click the Update button to refresh the page with the latest information on the switch.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure System Information

141

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

9. In the Link Dependency Interface Configuration section of the page, select which interfaces

are displayed on the page:

• Use LAG to display LAGs only.

• Use All to display all physical ports and LAGs.

10. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:

• Use the Go To Interface field by entering the interface in unit/slot/port format and

click the Go button. The entry corresponding to the specified interface, is selected.

• Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

11. In the Downstream Interface field, specify whether the interface belongs to the group’s

downstream list.

An interface that is defined as an upstream interface cannot be defined as a downstream

interface in the same link state group. The default value is False.

• Select False to delete an interface from the downstream list of the specified group.

• Select True to add an interface to the downstream list of the specified group.

12. In the Upstream Interface field, specify whether the interface belongs to the group’s

upstream list.

An interface that is defined as an upstream interface cannot be defined as a downstream

interface in the same link state group. The default value is False.

• Select False to delete an interface from the upstream list of the specified group.

• Select True to add an interface to the upstream list of the specified group.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the Link Dependency Interface Configuration nonconfigurable

information that displays on the page.

The following table describes the Link Dependency Group Statistic nonconfigurable

information that displays on the page.

Table 53. Link Dependency Interface Configuration Nonconfigurable Field

Field Description

Link Status Indicates whether the link for the corresponding interface is up or down.

Table 54. Link Dependency Group Statistic

Field Description

Group ID The Group ID for which data is displayed. The range is 1 to 16.

Link Action The action to be performed on downstream interfaces when all the

interfaces in the upstream list go down.

Group State The current state of the group.

Configure System Information

142

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Click the Update button to refresh the page with the latest information on the switch.

Configure ISDP

You can configure ISDP global and interface settings.

Configure ISDP Basic Global Settings

 To configure ISDP basic global settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > ISDP > Basic > Global Configuration.

6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the ISDP Service is enabled or disabled. The default value is

Enabled.

Group Transitions Indicates the number of group transitions.

Last Transition Time Indicates the time of the last group transitions.

Table 54. Link Dependency Group Statistic (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

143

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

7. Use Timer to specify the period of time between sending new ISDP packets.

The range is 5 to 254 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.

8. Use Hold Time to specify the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits.

The hold time specifies how long a receiving device must store information sent in the

ISDP packet before discarding it. The range 10 to 255 seconds. The default value is 180

seconds.

9. Select the Version 2 Advertisements Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device. The

default value is Enabled.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the ISDP Basic Global Configuration fields.

Configure ISDP Global Settings

 To configure ISDP global settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > ISDP > Advanced > Global Configuration.

Table 55. ISDP Basic Global Configuration

Field Description

Neighbors table last time changed Specifies if

Device ID The device ID of this switch.

Device ID Format Capability The device ID format capability.

Device ID Format The device ID format.

Configure System Information

144

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the ISDP Service is enabled or disabled. The default value is

Enable.

7. In the Timer field, specify the period of time between sending new ISDP packets.

The range is 5 to 254 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.

8. In the Hold Time field, specify the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits.

The hold time specifies how long a receiving device must store information sent in the

ISDP packet before discarding it. The range 10 to 255 seconds. The default value is 180

seconds.

9. Select the Version 2 Advertisements Disable or Enable radio button.

This enables or disables the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device. The

default value is Enable.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the ISDP Advanced Global Configuration fields.

Table 56. ISDP Advanced Global Configuration

Field Description

Neighbors table last time changed Displays when the Neighbors table last changed.

Device ID The device ID of this switch.

Device ID Format Capability The device ID format capability.

Device ID Format The device ID format.

Configure System Information

145

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure an ISDP Interface

 To configure an ISDP interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > ISDP > Advanced > Interface Configuration.

6. Use Port to select the port on which the admin mode is configured.

7. Use Admin mode to enable or disable ISDP on the port.

The default value is Enable.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View an ISDP Neighbor

 To view an ISDP neighbor:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Configure System Information

146

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > ISDP > Advanced > Neighbor.

The following table describes the ISDP Neighbor fields.

Table 57. ISDP Neighbor

Field Description

Device ID The device ID of the ISDP neighbor.

Interface The interface on which the neighbor is discovered.

Address The address of the neighbor.

Capability The capability of the neighbor. These are supported:

• Router

• Trans Bridge

• Source Route

• Switch

• Host

• IGMP

• Repeater

Platform The model type of the neighbor. (0 to 32)

Port ID The port ID on the neighbor.

Hold Time The hold time for ISDP packets that the neighbor transmits.

Advertisement Version The ISDP version sending from the neighbor.

Entry Last Changed Time The time since last entry is changed.

Software Version The software version on the neighbor.

Configure System Information

147

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View ISDP Statistics

 To view ISDP statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > ISDP > Advanced > Statistics.

The following table describes the ISDP Statistics fields.

Table 58. ISDP Statistics

Field Description

ISDP Packets Received The ISDP packets received including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets.

ISDP Packets Transmitted The ISDP packets transmitted including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets.

ISDPv1 Packets Received The ISDPv1 packets received.

ISDPv1 Packets Transmitted The ISDPv1 packets transmitted.

ISDPv2 Packets Received The ISDPv2 packets received.

ISDPv2 Packets Transmitted The ISDPv2 packets transmitted.

Configure System Information

148

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Timer Schedule

You can configure the global timer settings and the timer schedule.

Configure the Global Timer Settings

 To add or delete a global timer schedule:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration.

6. Use the Timer Schedule Name to specify the name of a timer schedule.

ISDP Bad Header The ISDP bad packets received.

ISDP Checksum Error The number of the checksum error.

ISDP Transmission Failure The number of the transmission failure.

ISDP Invalid Format The number of the invalid format ISDP packets received.

ISDP Table Full The table size of the ISDP table.

ISDP Ip Address Table Full The table size of the ISDP IP address table.

Table 58. ISDP Statistics (continued)

Field Description

Configure System Information

149

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

7. Take one of the following actions:

• Click the Add button.

The timer schedule is added. The configuration changes take effect immediately.

• Click the Delete button.

The timer schedule is deleted.The configuration changes take effect immediately.

Configure the Timer Schedule

 To configure the timer schedule:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Services > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Schedule Configuration.

6. In the Timer Schedule Name list, select the timer schedule.

7. In the Timer Schedule Type list, select Absolute or Periodic.

8. In the Timer Schedule Entry list, select the number of the timer schedule entries to be

configured or added.

If you are adding an entry, select new.

Configure System Information

150

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

9. In the Time Start field, enter the time of the day in format (HH:MM) when the schedule

operation is started.

This field is required. If no time is specified, the schedule does not start running.

10. In the Time End field, enter the time of the day in format (HH:MM) when the schedule

operation is terminated.

11. Use the Date Start to set the schedule start date.

If no date is specified, the schedule starts running immediately.

12. Use the Date Stop to set the schedule termination date.

If No End Date selected, the schedule operates indefinitely.

13. Use the Recurrence Pattern to show with what period the event repeats.

If recurrence is not needed (a timer schedule must be triggered just once), then set Date

Stop as equal to Date Start. There are the following possible values of recurrence:

• Daily. The timer schedule works with daily recurrence

Daily mode. Every WeekDay selection means that the schedule is triggered every

day from Monday to Friday. Every Day(s) selection means that the schedule is

triggered every defined number of days. If number of days is not specified, then the

schedule is triggered every day.

• Weekly. The timer schedule works with weekly recurrence

- Every Week(s). Define the number of weeks when the schedule is triggered. If

number of weeks is not specified, then the schedule is triggered every week.

- WeekDay. Specify the days of week when the schedule operates.

• Monthly. The timer schedule works with monthly recurrence

Monthly mode. Show the day of the month when the schedule is triggered. Field

Every Month(s) means that the schedule is triggered every defined number of

months.

14. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. The configuration changes take effect

immediately.

151

3. Stacking

This chapter covers the following topics:

• M4300 Series Switch Stacking Overview

• Firmware Synchronization and Upgrade

• Stack Configuration Maintenance

• Stack Master Election

• Stack Factory Defaults Reset Behavior

• Stack NSF

• Configure a Stack

• Run Stack Port Diagnostics

• Configure Stack Firmware Synchronization

• View NSF Summary Data

• View NSF Checkpoint Statistics

Note: The stacking feature applies to the M4300 series switches only.

Stacking

152

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

M4300 Series Switch Stacking Overview

A stackable switch is a switch that is fully functional operating as a stand-alone unit but can

also be set-up to operate together with up to seven other switches. This group of switches

shows the characteristics of a single switch while having the port capacity of the sum of the

combined switches.

One of the switches in the stack controls the operation of the stack. This switch is called the

stack master. The remaining switches in the stack are stack members. The stack members

use stacking technology to behave and work together as a unified system. Layer 2 and higher

protocols present the entire switch stack as a single entity to the network.

The stack master is the single point of stack-wide management. From the stack master, you

configure the following:

• System-level (global) features that apply to all stack members

• Interface-level features for all interfaces on any stack member

A switch stack is identified in the network by its network IP address. The network IP address

is assigned according to the MAC address of the stack master. Every stack member is

uniquely identified by its own stack member number, which is from 1 to 6. The stack master

can be any number within that range.

Stacking supports the following:

• Up to eight switches per stack

• Single IP address management through a web browser, the CLI, or SNMP.

• Master-slave configuration:

• The master retains configuration for entire stack.

• Automatic detection of new members, with synchronization of firmware (upgrade or

downgrade as needed).

• Configuration updates across the stack through a single operation.

• Automatic master failover. Fully resilient stack with chain and ring topology.

• Hot swapping (insertion and removal) of stack members.

Firmware Synchronization and Upgrade

All stack members must run the same software version to ensure compatibility within the

stack. By default, if a unit is added to the stack and its software version is not the same as the

stack master, that unit is not allowed to join the stack. You can enable the Stack Firmware

Auto Upgrade feature, which automatically synchronizes the firmware version on the new unit

with the version running on the stack master. The synchronization operation might result in

either upgrade or downgrade of firmware on the mismatched stack member.

Upgrading the firmware on a stack of switches is the same as upgrading the firmware on a

single switch. After you download a new image by using the File Download page or SCC, the

downloaded image is distributed to all the connected units of the stack.

Stacking

153

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Note: We recommend that you set the active image for all stack members

the same as the active image of the stack master. In other words, if

image1 is the active image on the stack master, all units must use

image1 as the active image. For information about configuring the

active image, see Configure Dual Image Settings on page 665.

Stack Configuration Maintenance

The stack master stores and maintains the saved and running configuration files for the

switch stack. The configuration files include the system-level settings for the switch stack and

the interface-level settings for all stack members. Each stack member retains a copy of the

saved file for backup purposes. If the master is removed from the stack or becomes

unavailable, another member is elected master and then runs from that saved configuration.

The switch master copies its running configuration to the stack member configured as the

standby unit whenever it changes (subject to some restrictions to reduce overhead). This

enables the standby unit to take over the stack operation with minimal interruption if the stack

master becomes unavailable. The running-config synchronization also occurs when the

running configuration is auto-saved on the stack master or when the standby unit changes.

Stack Master Election

All stack members are eligible stack masters. If the stack master becomes unavailable, the

remaining stack members participate in electing a new stack master from among themselves.

The following factors determine which switch is elected the stack master:

• The switch that is master always has priority to retain the role of master.

• Assigned priority.

• MAC address.

When the stack is powered up and completes the boot process or the original stack master

becomes unavailable, the stack master is determined through an election process.

The rules for stack master election are as follows:

• If a unit was elected stack master previously, then it remains the stack master and other

units are stack members.

• If no units were stack masters, or more than one unit was a stack master, then the unit

with the highest management preference is elected stack master. The management

preference can be assigned by the administrator. However, if all units are assigned the

same management preference, then the unit with the highest MAC address is assigned

as the stack master.

Stacking

154

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Stack Factory Defaults Reset Behavior

If the stack master is reset to the factory default settings (see Reset the Switch to Its Factory

Default Settings on page 653), the stack master applies the default settings to all the stack

members and resets the stack, including all participating stack members. When the stack

boots, the stack master election process begins.

A switch can be described in terms of three semi-independent functions called the forwarding

plane, the control plane, and the management plane. The forwarding plane forwards data

packets. The forwarding plane is implemented in hardware. The control plane is the set of

protocols that determine how the forwarding plane forwards packets, deciding which data

packets are allowed to be forwarded and where they go. Application software on the

management unit acts as the control plane. The management plane is application software

running on the management unit that provides interfaces allowing a network administrator to

configure and monitor the device.

Stack NSF

Nonstop forwarding (NSF) allows the forwarding plane of stack units to continue to forward

packets while the control and management planes restart as a result of a power failure,

hardware failure, or software fault on the management unit. A nonstop forwarding failover can

also be manually initiated by clicking the Initiate Failover button on the NSF Summary page.

Traffic flows that enter and exit the stack through physical ports on a unit other than the

management continue with at most sub-second interruption when the management unit fails.

To prepare the backup management unit in case of a failover, applications on the

management unit continuously checkpoint some state information to the backup unit.

Changes to the running configuration are automatically copied to the backup unit. MAC

addresses stay the same across a nonstop forwarding failover so that neighbors are not

required to relearn them.

When a nonstop forwarding failover occurs, the control plane on the backup unit starts from a

partially initialized state and applies the checkpointed state information. While the control

plane is initializing, the stack cannot react to external changes, such as network topology

changes. Once the control plane is fully operational on the new management unit, the control

plane ensures that the hardware state is updated as necessary. Control plane failover time

depends on the size of the stack, the complexity of the configuration, and the speed of the

CPU.

The management plane restarts when a failover occurs. Management connections must be

reestablished.

Stacking

155

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

For NSF to be effective, adjacent networking devices must not reroute traffic around the

restarting device. The switch uses three techniques to prevent traffic from being rerouted:

• A protocol can distribute a part of its control plane to stack units so that the protocol can

give the appearance that it is still functional during the restart. Spanning tree and port

channels use this technique.

• A protocol can enlist the cooperation of its neighbors through a technique known as

graceful restart. OSPF uses graceful restart if it is enabled.

• A protocol can restart after the failover if neighbors react slowly enough that they cannot

normally detect the outage. The IP multicast routing protocols are a good example of this

behavior.

To take full advantage of nonstop forwarding, Layer 2 connections to neighbors must be

through port channels that span two or more stack units, and Layer 3 routes must be ECMP

routes with next hops through physical ports on two or more units. The hardware can quickly

move traffic flows from port channel members or ECMP paths on a failed unit to a surviving

unit.

Configure a Stack

You can move the primary management unit functionality from one unit to another. Upon

execution, the entire stack (including all interfaces in the stack) is unconfigured and

reconfigured with the configuration on the new primary management unit. After the reload is

complete, all stack management capability must be performed on the new primary

management unit. To preserve the current configuration across a stack move, save the

current configuration to the NVRAM before performing the stack move. A stack move causes

all routes and Layer 2 addresses to be lost. The administrator is prompted to confirm the

management move.

Select a New Stack Master

 To select a new stack master:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Stacking > Basic > Stack Configuration.

Stacking

156

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The Management Unit Selected menu displays the current primary management unit.

6. To change the primary management unit, select another unit ID of the stack member to

become the stack master.

A message displays to notify you that moving stack management unconfigures the entire

stack including all interfaces.

7. Click the OK button to confirm the selection and reload the stack.

The stack is unavailable until the boot process completes.

Specify the Stack Sample Mode

 To specify the stack sample mode:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Stacking > Basic > Stack Configuration.

Use the Stack Sample mode section of the page to configure global status management

mode, and sample size. The mode and sample size parameters are applied globally to all

units in the stack.

6. In the Sample mode list, select one of the following:

• Cumulative. Tracks the sum of received time-stamp offsets cumulatively.

• History. Tracks the history of received timestamps.

7. In the Max Samples field, configure the maximum number of samples to keep.

Stacking

157

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The valid range is 100 to 500.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure a Stack Member

 To configure a stack member before adding it to the stack:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Stacking > Stack Configuration.

6. Select the Unit ID of the stack member to add.

7. Select the switch model number of the new unit from the Switch Type field.

8. Optionally, specify the Switch Priority to select whether this unit becomes a management

unit in preference to another unit.

The default value for this setting is undefined. If the preference level is set to zero, then

the device cannot become a management unit. A higher value indicates a higher priority.

The maximum value is 15.

9. Use the Management Status field to indicate whether the selected switch is the stack

master, a normal stacking member, or the standby unit.

A standby unit takes over the stack master responsibilities if the stack master becomes

unavailable.

Stacking

158

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

10. Click the Add button.

The preconfigured unit is added to the stack.

Change the Settings for an Existing Stack Member

 To change the settings for an existing stack member:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Stacking > Stack Configuration.

The Stack Configuration page displays.

6. Select the check box next to the stack member to configure.

7. If desired, specify a new unit ID for the stack member in the Change to Switch ID field.

The renumbering process causes the unit to reload.

8. Specify the switch type, priority, or management status from the available fields.

9. Click the Apply button.

The changes to the stack member are saved.

Note: If you configured a new unit number for an existing stack member, you

are asked to confirm the change. Click the OK button to continue or

click the Cancel button to retain the original settings.

10. To make other changes, do the following:

• To remove the selected unit from the stack, click the Delete button.

• To update the page with the latest information from the switch, click the Refresh

button.

Note: If you are adding or removing a dummy unit with PoE for

preconfiguration, you must log in again to an actual web session to

apply changes and observe relevant PoE web pages.

11. If you made any changes, click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Stacking

159

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Stack Configuration fields.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Stack Status information that is displayed.

Table 59. Stack Configuration

Field Description

Hardware Management

Preference

The hardware management preference of the switch. The hardware

management preference can be disabled or unassigned.

Standby Status Identifies the switch that is configured as the standby unit. The possible

values are as follows:

• Cfg Standby. Indicates that the unit is configured as the standby unit.

The unit configured as the standby switch becomes the stack manager if

the current manager fails.

• Opr Standby. Indicates that this unit is operating as the standby unit

and the configured standby unit is not part of the stack.

• None. The switch is not configured as the standby unit.

Switch Status The status of the selected unit. The possible values are as follows:

• OK

• Unsupported

• Code Mismatch

• Config Mismatch

• Not Present

Table 60. Stack Status nonconfigurable fields

Field Description

Hardware Management

Preference

The hardware management preference of the switch, which can be

disabled or unassigned.

Standby Status Identifies the switch that is configured as the standby unit:

• Cfg Standby. The unit is configured as the standby unit. The unit

configured as the standby switch becomes the stack manager if

the current manager fails.

• Opr Standby. This unit is operating as the standby unit and the

configured standby Unit is not part of the stack.

• None. The switch is not configured as the standby unit.

Switch Status The status of the selected unit. Possible values are as follows:

• OK. The unit is connected and works properly.

• Unsupported. The type of inserted unit is not supported.

• Code Mismatch. The code version is not identical to the

master/management unit.

• Config Mismatch. The inserted device type is different from the

configured devices.

• Not Present. The unit is not connected.

• SDM Mismatch. SDM template mismatch.

• Updating Code. A code update is in progress.

• STM Mismatch. STM template mismatch.

Stacking

160

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure the Mode of the Stack Ports

By default, the stack ports on each switch are configured for stacking. However, you can use

these ports as standard Ethernet ports. Use the Stack Port Configuration page to configure

the mode of the stack ports and to view information about the ports.

 To configure the mode of the stack ports:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Port Configuration.

Unit ID The unit ID of the specific switch.

Switch Description The description for the unit that is configured by the user.

Serial Number The unique box serial number for this switch.

Up Time The relative time since the last reboot of the switch.

Preconfigured Model Identifier The model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the

device.

Plugged-In Model Identifier The model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the

plugged-in device.

Detected Code Version The detected version of code on this unit.

Detected Code in Flash The release number and version number of the code stored in flash.

SFS Last Attempt Status The stack firmware synchronization last attempt status.

Table 60. Stack Status nonconfigurable fields (continued)

Field Description

Stacking

161

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The page is shown in two parts.

6. Select the check box associated with the unit and port to configure:

7. From the Configured Stack mode field, select the operating mode of the port to be either:

• Stack. The port connects to the stack port on another stack member. This is the

default value for back panel stack mode.

• Ethernet. The port operates as a standard switch port that receives and transmits

network traffic. This is the default value for front panel stack mode.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes Stack Port Configuration fields.

Table 61. Stack Port Configuration

Field Description

Unit ID The unit.

Port The stackable interfaces on the given unit.

Slot ID The slot ID in the format unit/slot.

Type The type of stackable interfaces on the given unit.

Product Name The name of the XFP/SFP+ adapter.

Running Stack mode The run-time mode of the stackable interface.

Link Status The link status (UP/DOWN) of the port.

Link Speed (Gbps) The maximum speed of the stacking port.

Stacking

162

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Run Stack Port Diagnostics

 To run stack port diagnostics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Port Diagnostics.

Transmit Data Rate (Mbps) The approximate transmit rate on the stacking port.

Transmit Error Rate The number of errors in transmit packets per second.

Total Transmit Errors The total number of errors in transmit packets since boot. The counter might

wrap.

Receive Data Rate (Mbps) The approximate receive rate on the stacking port.

Receive Error Rate The number of errors in receive packets per second.

Total Receive Errors The total number of errors in receive packets since boot. The counter might

wrap.

Link Flaps The total number of link flaps.

Table 61. Stack Port Configuration (continued)

Field Description

Stacking

163

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Select Unit ID to display the packet path starting from the selected unit.

7. Select All to display the packet path from all the units in the stack.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the Stack Port Diagnostics fields.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Stack Port Packet Path fields.

Configure Stack Firmware Synchronization

 To configure the stack firmware synchronization features:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Firmware Synchronization.

Table 62. Stack Port Diagnostics

Field Definition

Unit ID The unit.

Port The stackable interface on the given unit.

Port Diagnostics Info Displays three text fields (80 character strings) populated by the

driver containing debug and status information.

Table 63. Stack Port Packed Path

Field Definition

Direction The path direction.

Packet Path The packet path.

Stacking

164

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Specify whether Stack Firmware Auto Upgrade is enabled or disabled.

This feature determines what to do when a new member attempts to join the stack, and

its firmware does not match the version running on the master.

• Enable. The stack master upgrades the version on the new member to match the

version running on the rest of the stack.

• Disable. The new member is not allowed to join.

7. Use the Traps field to enable or disable sending of traps during stack firmware

synchronization start, failure, or finish.

8. Use the Allow Downgrade field to determine whether the stack master downgrades the

firmware version on a new member that attempts to join the stack if the new member has a

firmware version that is more recent that the stack.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View NSF Summary Data

 To display NSF Summary data:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Stacking > NSF > NSF Summary

Stacking

165

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use the Admin Status radio button to enable or disable the NSF feature on the stack.

When enabled, the stack selects a backup unit. Applications on the management unit copy

data to the backup unit.

7. To cause the supervisor unit to fail over to the backup blade, click the Initiate Failover

button on the top right corner of the page.

8. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable NSF Summary data that is displayed.

Table 64. NSF Summary

Field Description

Operational Status Indicates whether NSF is enabled on the chassis. NSF is enabled

by default.

Last Startup Reason The type of activation that caused the software to start the last

time. The possible values are as follows:

• Power On. The switch is rebooted. A power cycle or an

administrative reload command might caused this

• Cold Admin Move. The system resets all hardware tables

without a reboot and the application begins from a

pre-initialized state, but no data is retained from before the

failover.

• Warm Admin Move. The administrator issued a command for

the standby manager to take over.

• Auto Warm. The primary management card restarted due to a

failure, and the system executed a nonstop forwarding failover.

• Auto Cold. The system switched from the active manager to

the backup manager and could not maintain user data traffic.

This is usually caused by multiple failures occurring close

together.

Stacking

166

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View NSF Checkpoint Statistics

 To view NSF checkpoint statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select System > Chassis > NSF > Checkpoint Statistics.

Time Since Last Restart Time since the current management card because the active

management card. For the backup manager, the value is set to

0d:00:00:00.

Restart In Progress Indicates whether a restart is in progress. A restart is not

considered complete until all hardware tables are fully reconciled.

Warm Restart Ready Indicates whether the initial full checkpoint finished.

Copy of Running Configuration to Backup Unit

Status Status of copying the running configuration to backup blades.

Backup Configuration Age Indicates the time since the running configuration was last copied

to the backup blade.

Time Until Next Backup Indicates the number of seconds until the running configuration is

copied to the backup blade.

NSF Support on Unit

Unit ID The slot number for the blade.

NSF Support Displays whether the switch supports the nonstop forwarding

(NSF) feature.

Table 64. NSF Summary (continued)

Field Description

Stacking

167

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To reset the statistics on the page, click the Clear button.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 65. NSF Checkpoint Statistics

Field Description

Messages Checkpoint The number of messages sent from the supervisor to the backup

blade.

Bytes Checkpointed How much data was sent from the supervisor until to the backup

blade.

Time Since Counters Cleared The amount of time since the counters were reset.

Checkpoint Message Rate The number of seconds between measurements.

Last 10-second Message Rate How many messages were sent in the last measurement interval.

Highest 10-second Message Rate The highest number of messages that were sent in a

measurement interval.

168

4. Configure Switching Information

This chapter covers the following topics:

• Configure VLANs

• Auto-VoIP

• iSCSI Overview

• Spanning Tree Protocol

• Multicast

• Configure MVR

• MAC Address Table

• Port Settings

• Link Aggregation Groups

• Multiple Registration Protocol Overview

• Loop Protection

Configure Switching Information

169

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure VLANs

Adding virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both

bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2

header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which

provides better administration, security, and management of multicast traffic.

By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically

separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast

packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be

grouped by logical function instead of physical location.

Each VLAN in a network is assigned an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE

802.1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station can omit

the tag, or the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the

packet can either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A given port can handle

traffic for more than one VLAN, but it can support only one default VLAN ID.

You can define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table. Each switch in the

M4200 and M4300 family supports up to 1024 VLANs. VLAN 1 is created by default and is

the default VLAN of which all ports are members.

Configure Basic VLAN Settings

The internal VLAN is reserved by a port-based routing interface and invisible to the end user.

Once these internal VLANs are allocated by the port-based routing interface, they cannot be

assigned to a routing VLAN interface.

 To configure internal VLAN settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Configure Switching Information

170

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration.

6. To reset VLAN settings to their default values, select the Reset Configuration check box.

The factory default values are as follows:

• All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.

• All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.

• All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.

• All ports are configured with Ingress Filtering disabled.

• All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.

• GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared.

All VLANs, except for the default VLAN, are deleted.

7. Specify the internal VLAN settings.

The Internal VLAN Configuration section displays the allocation base and the allocation

mode of internal VLAN.

a. Use Internal VLAN Allocation Base to specify the VLAN allocation base for the

routing interface.

The default base range of the internal VLAN is 1 to 4093.

b. Select the Internal VLAN Allocation Policy Ascending or Descending radio

button.

This specifies a policy for the internal VLAN allocation.

8. Use VLAN ID to specify the VLAN identifier for the new VLAN.

The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.

9. Use the optional VLAN Name field to specify a name for the VLAN.

Configure Switching Information

171

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The VLAN name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The

default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.

The VLAN Type field identifies the type of the VLAN you are configuring. You cannot

change the type of the default VLAN (VLAN ID = 1): it is always type Default. When you

create a VLAN using this page, its type is always Static. A VLAN that is created by GVRP

registration initially uses a type of Dynamic. When configuring a dynamic VLAN, you can

change its type to Static.

10. Click the Add button.

The VLAN is added to the switch.

11. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Reset the VLAN Configuration to Default Setting

 To reset the VLAN configuration to default settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

Configure Switching Information

172

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Select the Reset Configuration check box.

WARNING:

If you select this button and confirm your selection on the next

page, all VLAN configuration parameters are reset to their factory

default values.

7. Confirm your selection.

All VLANs, except for the default VLAN, are deleted. The factory default values are as

follows:

• All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.

• All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.

• All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.

• All ports are configured with ingress filtering disabled.

• All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.

• GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared.

Configure an Internal VLAN

The Internal VLAN section displays the allocation base and the allocation mode of internal

VLAN. The internal VLAN is reserved by a port-based routing interface and invisible to the

end user. Once these internal VLANs are allocated by the port-based routing interface, they

cannot be assigned to a routing VLAN interface.

 To configure an internal VLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Configure Switching Information

173

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration.

6. In the Internal VLAN Allocation Base field, specify the VLAN allocation base for the routing

interface.

You can enter a value from 1 to 4093.

7. Select the Internal VLAN Allocation Policy Ascending or Descending radio button.

This specifies a policy for the internal VLAN allocation.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure VLAN Trunking

You can configure switchport mode settings on interfaces. The switchport mode defines the

purpose of the port based on the type of device it connects to and constraints the VLAN

configuration of the port accordingly. Assigning the appropriate switchport mode helps

simplify VLAN configuration and minimize errors.

 To configure VLAN trunking:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Configure Switching Information

174

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Trunking Configuration.

6. To specify which interfaces are displayed on the page, select one of the following options:

• Select the Unit ID field to display physical port information for the selected unit.

• Use LAG to display LAGs only.

• Use All to display all physical ports.

7. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:

• Use Go To Interface to select an interface by entering its number.

• Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

8. In the Switchport Mode list, select one of the following:

• Access. This mode is suitable for ports connected to end stations or end users.

Access ports participate in only one VLAN. They accept both tagged and untagged

packets, but always transmit untagged packets.

• Trunk. This mode is intended for ports that are connected to other switches. Trunk

ports can participate in multiple VLANs and accept both tagged and untagged

packets.

• General. This mode enables custom configuration of a port. You configure the

general port VLAN attributes, such as membership, PVID, tagging, ingress filter, and

so on, using the settings on the Port Configuration page. By default, all ports are

initially configured in General mode.

• Host. This mode is used for private VLAN configuration.

• Promiscuous. This mode is used for private VLAN configuration.

9. Select from the list to configure the Access VLAN ID.

This is the access VLAN for the port, and is valid only when the port switchport mode is

Access.

Configure Switching Information

175

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

10. Select from the list to configure the Native VLAN ID.

This is the native VLAN for the port, and is valid only when the port switchport mode is

Trunk.

11. Configure the Trunk Allowed VLANs.

This is the set of VLANs of which the port can be a member when configured in Trunk

mode. By default, this list contains all possible VLANs, even if they are not yet created.

VLAN IDs are in the range 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range, or a comma (,)

to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces are not permitted. A zero value clears the allowed

VLANs. An All value sets all VLANs in the range (1 to 4093).

12. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch.Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The Native VLAN Tagging field displays enabled or disabled:

• When VLAN tagging is enabled, if the trunk port receives untagged frames, it forwards

them on the native VLAN with no VLAN tag.

• When VLAN tagging is disabled, if the trunk port receives untagged frames, it includes

the native VLAN ID in the VLAN tag when forwarding

Configure VLAN Membership

 To configure VLAN membership:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Membership.

Configure Switching Information

176

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. In the VLAN ID list, select the VLAN ID.

7. In the Group Operation list, select all the ports and configure them:

• Untag All. Select all the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. All the ports are included in the VLAN.

• Tag All. Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged. All

the ports are included in the VLAN.

• Remove All. All the ports that can be dynamically registered in this VLAN through

GVRP. This selection excludes all ports from the selected VLAN.

8. In the Port display, select port numbers to add them to this VLAN.

Each port can use one of three modes:

• T (Tagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.

The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• U (Untagged). Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are

untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.

• BLANK (Autodetect). Select the ports that can be dynamically registered in this

VLAN through GVRP. This selection excludes a port from the selected VLAN.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

177

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

View VLAN Status

You can view the status of all currently configured VLANs.

 To view the VLAN status:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Status.

Table 66. Advanced VLAN Membership

Field Definition

VLAN Name The name for the VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32

alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. VLAN ID 1 always

uses the name Default.

VLAN Type The type of the VLAN you selected:

• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present

• Static. A VLAN that you configured

• Dynamic. A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not

convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove

Configure Switching Information

178

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure Port PVID Settings

You can assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface. There are certain requirements for a

PVID:

• You must define a PVID for all ports.

• If no other value is specified, the default VLAN PVID is used.

• To change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as

a member.

• Use the Port VLAN ID (PVID) Configuration page to configure a virtual LAN on a port.

 To configure PVID settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Port PVID Configuration.

Table 67. VLAN Status

Field Definition

VLAN ID The VLAN identifier (VID) of the VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1

to 4093.

VLAN Name The name of the VLAN. VLAN ID 1 is always named `Default`.

VLAN Type The VLAN type:

• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present

• Static. A VLAN that you configured

• Dynamic. A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not

convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove

Routing Interface The interface associated with the VLAN, in the case that VLAN routing

is configured for this VLAN.

Member Ports The ports that are included in the VLAN.

Configure Switching Information

179

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To display information for all physical ports and LAGs, click the ALL button.

7. Select the interfaces.

Select the Interface check box next to the interfaces. You can select multiple interfaces.

To select all the interfaces, select the Interface check box in the heading row.

8. In the PVID field, specify the VLAN ID to assign to untagged or priority-tagged frames

received on this port.

The factory default is 1.

9. In the VLAN Member field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a member port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. The factory default is 1. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a

range or a comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted.

10. In the VLAN Tag field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a tagged port.

VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to

separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted. To reset the VLAN tag

configuration to the defaults, use the None keyword. Port tagging for the VLAN can be

set only if the port is a member of this VLAN.

11. In the Acceptable Frame Types list, specify the types of frames that can be received on

this port.

The options are VLAN only and Admit All:

• When set to VLAN only, untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this

port are discarded.

• When set to Admit All, untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this

port are accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for this port. With either

option, VLAN-tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN

specification.

12. In the Configured Ingress Filtering field, select Enabled or Disabled.

• When enabled, the frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with

which this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN

ID in the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the port VLAN ID specified for the

port that received this frame.

Configure Switching Information

180

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

• When disabled, all frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge

specification. The factory default is disabled.

13. In the Port Priority field, specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets

arriving at the port.

You can enter a number from 0 to 7.

14. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure a MAC-Based VLAN

The MAC-Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN

and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet.

You define a MAC to VLAN mapping by configuring an entry in the MAC to VLAN table. An

entry is specified through a source MAC address and the desired VLAN ID. The MAC to

VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device (that is, there is a system-wide

table with MAC address to VLAN ID mappings).

When untagged or priority-tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the MAC to

VLAN table, the source MAC address of the packet is looked up. If an entry is found, the

corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. If the packet is already priority tagged it

maintains this value; otherwise, the priority is set to zero. The assigned VLAN ID is verified

against the VLAN table, if the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues;

otherwise the packet is dropped. This implies that the user is allowed to configure a MAC

address mapping to a VLAN that was not created on the system.

 To add or delete a MAC-based VLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN.

Configure Switching Information

181

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. In the MAC Address field, type a valid MAC address to be bound to a VLAN ID.

This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN is created.

7. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093.

8. Take one of the following actions:

• To add the add a MAC address to the VLAN mapping, click the Add button.

• To delete a MAC address from VLAN mapping, click the Delete button.

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups

You can use a protocol-based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets. By

default, if you do not configure any port-based (IEEE 802.1Q) or protocol-based VLANs,

untagged packets are assigned to VLAN 1. You can override this behavior by defining either

port-based VLANs or protocol-based VLANs, or both. Tagged packets are always handled

according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard, and are not included in protocol-based VLANs.

If you assign a port to a protocol-based VLAN for a specific protocol, untagged frames

received on that port for that protocol are assigned the protocol-based VLAN ID. Untagged

frames received on the port for other protocols are assigned the Port VLAN ID, either the

default PVID (1) or a PVID you specifically assigned to the port using the Port VLAN

Configuration page.

You define a protocol-based VLAN by creating a group. Each group has a one-to-one

relationship with a VLAN ID, can include one to three protocol definitions, and can include

multiple ports. When you create a group, you specify a name and a group ID is assigned

automatically.

 To configure a protocol-based VLAN group:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Configure Switching Information

182

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration.

6. In the Group Name field, type a name for the new group.

You can enter up to 16 characters.

7. In the Protocol field, select the protocols to be associated with the group.

There are three configurable protocols:

• IP. IP is a network layer protocol that provides a connectionless service for the

delivery of data.

• ARP. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a low-level protocol that dynamically

maps network layer addresses to physical medium access control (MAC) addresses.

• IPX. The internetwork packet exchange (IPX) is a connectionless datagram

network-layer protocol that forwards data over a network.

8. In the VLAN ID field, select the VLAN ID.

It can be any number in the range of 1 to 4093. All the ports in the group assigns this

VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols that you included in this group.

9. Click the Add button.

The protocol-based VLAN group is added to the switch.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership

 To configure protocol-based VLAN group membership:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

Table 68. Protocol Based VLAN Group

Field Description

Group ID A number used to identify the group created by the user. Group IDs are

automatically assigned when a group is created by the user.

Ports Display all the member ports that belong to the group.

Configure Switching Information

183

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership.

6. In the Group ID list, select the protocol-based VLAN group ID.

7. Select port numbers (1, 2, 3, and so on) to select ports to add to this protocol-based VLAN

group.

An interface can belong to only one group for a given protocol. If you already added a

port to a group for IP, you cannot add it to another group that also includes IP, although

you can add it to a new group for IPX.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure an IP Subnet-Based VLAN

IP subnet-to-VLAN mapping is defined by configuring an entry in the IP Subnet to VLAN

table. An entry is specified through a source IP address, network mask, and the desired

VLAN ID. The IP subnet-to-VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device.

Table 69. Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership

Field Description

Group Name This field identifies the name for the protocol-based VLAN that you

selected. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including

blanks.

Current Members This button can be click to show the current numbers in the selected

protocol-based VLAN group.

Configure Switching Information

184

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

 To add or delete an IP subnet-based VLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > IP Subnet Based VLAN.

6. In the IP Address field, specify a valid IP address bound to the VLAN ID.

Enter the IP address in dotted-decimal notation.

7. In the Subnet Mask field, specify a valid subnet mask of the IP address.

Enter the subnet mask in dotted-decimal notation.

8. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of (1 to 4093).

9. Take one of the following actions:

• To add the IP subnet-based VLAN, click the Add button.

• To delete the IP subnet-based VLAN, click the Delete button.

Configure a Port DVLAN

 To configure a port DVLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Configure Switching Information

185

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Port DVLAN Configuration.

6. Select Interface check boxes to select the physical interface.

To select all ports, select the Interface check box at the top of the column.

7. In the Admin Mode field, select Enabled or Disabled.

This specifies the administrative mode through which double VLAN ragging can be

enabled or disabled. The default value for this is Disabled.

8. In the Global EtherType field, specify the first 16 bits of the DVLAN tag:

• 802.1Q Tag. Commonly used tag representing 0x8100

• vMAN Tag. Commonly used tag representing 0x88A8

• Custom Tag. Configure the EtherType in any range from 0 to 65535

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure a Voice VLAN

You can configure the parameters for voice VLAN configuration. Only users with read/write

access privileges can change the data on this page.

 To configure a voice VLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

Configure Switching Information

186

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > Voice VLAN Configuration.

6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies the administrative mode for voice VLAN for the switch. The default is

Disable.

7. Use Interface to select the physical interface.

8. Use Interface Mode to select the voice VLAN mode for selected interface:

• Disable. This is the default value.

• None. Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.

• VLAN ID. Configure the phone to send tagged voice traffic.

• dot1pConfigure voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic. When this is

selected, enter the dot1p value in the Value field.

• Untagged. Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.

9. Use Value to enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value.

This is enabled only when VLAN ID or dot1p is selected as the interface mode.

10. In the CoS Override Mode field, select Disable or Enable.

The default is Disable.

11. In the Authentication Mode field, select Enable or Disable.

The default is Enable. When the authentication mode is enabled, voice traffic is allowed

on an unauthorized voice VLAN port. When the authentication mode is disabled, devices

are authorized through dot1x.

Note: Authentication through dot1x is possible only if dot1x is enabled.

Configure Switching Information

187

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

12. In the DSCP Value field, configure the Voice VLAN DSCP value for the port.

The valid range is 0 to 64. The default value is 0.

The Operational State field displays the operational status of the voice VLAN on the

interface.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure GARP Switch Settings

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take

effect.

 To configure GARP switch settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Switch Configuration.

6. Select the GVRP Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This selects the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the switch.

The factory default is Disable.

7. Select the GMRP Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This selects the GARP multicast registration protocol administrative mode for the switch.

The factory default is Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

Configure Switching Information

188

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure GARP Port

Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take

effect.

 To configure GARP port:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Port Configuration.

6. Use Interface to select the physical interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

7. In the Port GVRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the port.If

you select Disable, the protocol is not active and the join time, leave time, and leave all

time have no effect. The factory default is Disable.

8. In the Port GMRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable

Configure Switching Information

189

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

This specifies the GARP multicast registration protocol administrative mode for the port. If

you select Disable, the protocol is not active, and the join time, leave time, and leave all

time have no effect. The factory default is Disable.

9. In the Join Time (centiseconds) field, specify the time between the transmission of GARP

PDUs registering (or re-registering) membership for a VLAN or multicast group in

centiseconds.

Enter a number between 10 and 100 (0.1 to 1.0 seconds). The factory default is 20

centiseconds (0.2 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for

each port.

10. In the Leave Time (centiseconds) field, specify the time to wait after receiving an

unregister request for a VLAN or multicast group before deleting the associated entry, in

centiseconds.

This allows time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute to

maintain uninterrupted service. Enter a number between 20 and 600 (0.2 to 6.0 seconds).

The factory default is 60 centiseconds (0.6 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for

each GARP participant for each port.

11. Use Leave All Time (centiseconds) to control how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are

generated.

A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will be deregistered soon. To maintain

registration, participants must rejoin. The leave all period timer is set to a random value in

the range of LeaveAllTime to 1.5*LeaveAllTime. The timer is specified in centiseconds.

Enter a number between 200 and 6000 (2 to 60 seconds). The factory default is 1000

centiseconds (10 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for

each port.

12. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Auto-VoIP

You can configure protocol-based port settings and OUI settings.

Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings

 To configure protocol-based port settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Configure Switching Information

190

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Protocol-based > Port Settings.

6. In the Prioritization Type field, select Traffic Class or Remark.

This specifies the type of prioritization.

7. In the Class Value list, specify the CoS tag value to be reassigned for packets received on

the voice VLAN when Remark CoS is enabled.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties

 To configure auto-VoIP OUI-based properties:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Configure Switching Information

191

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Properties.

6. In the VoIP VLAN ID field, type the VoIP VLAN ID of the switch.

There is no default VLAN for auto-VoIP, you must create a VLAN for it first.

7. In the OUI-based priority list, select the OUI-based priority of the switch.

The default value is 7.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

OUI-Based Port Settings

 To configure auto-VoIP OUI-based port settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Port Settings.

Configure Switching Information

192

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The Operational Status field displays the current operational status of each interface.

6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:

• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on

the Go button.

• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to

configure.

7. In the Auto VoIP Mode field, select Disable or Enable.

Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Add a New Entry to the OUI Table

 To add a new entry to the OUI table:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

Configure Switching Information

193

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. In the Telephony OUI(s) field, specify the VoIP OUI prefix to be added in the format

AA:BB:CC.

Up to 128 OUIs can be configured.

7. In the Description field, enter the description for the OUI.

The maximum length of description is 32 characters. The following OUIs are present in

the configuration by default:

• 00:01:E3 - SIEMENS

• 00:03:6B - CISCO1

• 00:12:43 - CISCO2

• 00:0F:E2 - H3C

• 00:60:B9 - NITSUKO

• 00:D0:1E - PINTEL

• 00:E0:75 - VERILINK

• 00:E0:BB - 3COM

• 00:04:0D - AVAYA1

• 00:1B:4F - AVAYA2

8. Click the Add button.

The telephony OUI entry is added.

Delete Entries From the OUI Table

 To delete one or more entries from the OUI table:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table.

The OUI table displays.

6. Select one or more entries in the table.

7. Click the Delete button.

The entries are deleted.

Configure Switching Information

194

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View the Auto-VoIP Status

 To view the auto-VoIP status:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Auto-VoIP Status.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable Auto-VoIP status information.

iSCSI Overview

The Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) feature helps network administrators

track iSCSI traffic between iSCSI initiators and target systems. This is accomplished by

monitoring or snooping traffic to detect packets used by iSCSI stations in establishing iSCSI

sessions and connections. Data from these exchanges is used to create classification rules

that assign the traffic between the stations to a configured traffic class. Packets in the flow

are queued and scheduled for egress on the destination port based on these rules.

Table 70. Auto-VoIP Status

Field Description

Auto-VoIP VLAN ID The auto-VoIP VLAN ID.

Maximum Number of Voice

Channels Supported

The maximum number of voice channels supported.

Number of Voice Channels

Detected

The number of VoIP channels prioritized successfully.

Configure Switching Information

195

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

In networks containing iSCSI initiators and targets, iSCSI helps to monitor iSCSI sessions or

give iSCSI traffic preferential Quality of Service (QoS) treatment. Dynamically-generated

classifier rules are used to direct the iSCSI data traffic to queues that can be given the

desired preference characteristics over other data traveling through the switch. This might

help to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause

iSCSI packets to be dropped. However, in systems where a large proportion of traffic is

iSCSI, it might also interfere with other network control-plane traffic, such as ARP or LACP.

The preferential treatment of iSCSI traffic must be balanced against the needs of other critical

data in the network.

You can view and manage iSCSI Optimization settings on the device. iSCSI Optimization

provides a means of giving traffic between iSCSI initiator and target systems special Quality

of Service (QoS) treatment.

In addition, if configured, the packets can be updated with IEEE 802.1 or IP-DSCP values.

This is done by enabling Remark. Remarking packets with priority data provides special QoS

treatment as the packets continue through the network.

Configure Global iSCSI Settings

 To configure the global iSCSI settings on the switch:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > iSCSI > Basic > Global Configuration.

6. In the iSCSI Status field, select Enable or Disable.

Configure Switching Information

196

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

This globally enables or disables the iSCSI Optimization feature. By default, iSCSI

Optimization is disabled.

7. Select the QoS Profile VLAN Priority Tag or DSCP radio button.

This specifies the Quality of Service (QoS) profile that is applied to iSCSI flows. By

default, iSCSI flows are assigned to the highest VLAN Priority tag (VPT)/DSCP mapped

to the highest queue not used for switch management or voice VLAN.

Setting the VLAN Priority tag/DSCP sets the QoS profile which determines the egress

queue to which the frame is mapped. The switch default setting for egress queues

scheduling is Weighted Round Robin (WRR). Complete the QoS setting by configuring

the relevant ports to work in other scheduling and queue management modes through the

Class of Service settings. Depending on the platform, these choices might include strict

priority for the queue used for iSCSI traffic. The downside of strict priority is that, in certain

circumstances (under heavy high priority traffic), other lower priority traffic might get

starved. In WRR, the queue to which the flow is assigned to can be set to get the required

percentage.

8. Configure the global traffic class mapping in Class of Service.

The global traffic class mapping configuration determines the traffic class used to transmit

iSCSI packets. The traffic mapping configuration options are as follows:

• IEEE 802.1P

• IP-DSCP

The configuration of the CoS component determines changes in the mapping of IEEE

802.1p or IP-DSCP values to traffic classes. For more information, see Class of Service

on page 453.

9. If you are using VLAN Priority as the QoS profile, in the VLAN Priority Tag field, select the

iSCSI session packets.

The range is 0 to 7. The default is 5.

10. If you are using DSCP as the QoS profile, in the DSCP list, select a value to assign iSCSI

session packets.

The range is 0 to 63. The default is 46.

11. Select the Remark Enable or Disable radio button.

This enables or disables the marking of iSCSI frames with the configured VLAN Priority

tag/DSCP when egressing the switch. Enabling remarks updates the packets with IEEE

802.1p or IP-DSCP values. Remarking packets with priority data provides special QoS

treatment as the packets continue through the network. Remark is enabled by default.

12. In the iSCSI Aging Time field, set the number of minutes a session can be inactive prior to

If using DSCP as the QoS profile, useremoval.

The iSCSI Aging Time must be a whole number in the range of 1 to 43200 minutes. The

default is 10 minutes.

13. Click the Apply button.

Configure Switching Information

197

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View iSCSI Sessions

 To view active iSCSI session information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. click Switching > iSCSI > Basic > Sessions.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable iSCSI Sessions information.

Table 71. iSCSI Sessions

Field Description

Target Name The target’s name.

Initiator Name The initiator’s name.

Initiator Session ID (ISID) The iSCSI identifier.

Configure Switching Information

198

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Control iSCSI Target Settings

You can view iSCSI targets and assign target ports/port IP address combinations for iSCSI

optimization on the switch.

 To configure iSCSI target settings

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > iSCSI > Advanced > iSCSI Targets.

6. In the TCP Port field, specify the TCP port for the target that monitors iSCSI traffic.

Up to 16 TCP ports can be defined in the system. The well-known iSCSI ports 860 and

3260 are configured as defaults but you can remove them as any other configured target.

7. In the IP address field, specify an IP address for the target that monitors iSCSI traffic.

The default is 0.0.0.0.

8. In the Target Name field, specify a name to assign to the target.

The iSCSI Target Name can be up to 233 characters in length.

9. Click the Add button.

The iSCSI targets configuration is added.

Configure Switching Information

199

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View iSCSI Sessions

 To view information about active iSCSI sessions:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > iSCSI > Advanced > Sessions.

The following describes the nonconfigurable iSCSI Sessions information that is displayed.

View iSCSI Session Details

You can view detailed information about active iSCSI sessions.

 To view the iSCSI session details:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

Table 72. iSCSI Sessions

Field Description

Target Name The target’s name.

Initiator Name The initiator’s name.

Initiator Session ID (ISID) The unique identifier an initiator assigns to its session endpoint which,

when combined with the iSCSI initiator name, provides a unique name

for the iSCSI initiator port.

Configure Switching Information

200

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > iSCSI > Advanced > Sessions Detailed.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable iSCSI Sessions Detailed information.

Table 73. iSCSI Sessions Detailed

Field Description

Session Index The list of session indices.

The rest of the fields on this page correspond to the currently selected Session Index.

Target Name The target’s name.

Initiator Name The initiator’s name.

Up Time The time elapsed since the creation of the current session.

Time for Aging Out (in Seconds) The time left for the current session to expire in seconds.

Initiator Session ID (ISID) The unique identifier an initiator assigns to its session endpoint which,

when combined with the iSCSI initiator name, provides a unique name

for the iSCSI initiator port.

Initiator IP Address The initiator’s IP address.

Initiator TCP Port The initiator’s TCP port number of one of the connections between the

target and initiator.

Target IP Address The IP address of the target.

Target TCP Port The target’s TCP port number of one of the connections between the

target and initiator.

Configure Switching Information

201

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Spanning Tree Protocol

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of bridges.

STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops. Spanning

tree versions supported include Common STP, Multiple STP, and Rapid STP.

Classic STP provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops. For

information on configuring Common STP, see Configure CST Port Settings on page 208.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports multiple instances of Spanning Tree to

efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces. Each instance of the Spanning Tree

behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight

modifications in the working but not the end effect (chief among the effects, is the rapid

transitioning of the port to Forwarding). The difference between the RSTP and the traditional

STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports

which are connected to end stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to Forwarding

state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are represented

by the parameters pointtopoint and edgeport. MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP. It

behaves appropriately to STP and RSTP bridges. A MSTP bridge can be configured to

behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or a STP bridge.

Note: For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version must be

802.1s and their configuration name, digest key, and revision level

must match. For additional information about regions and their effect

on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

Configure Basic STP Settings

 To configure STP basic settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Basic > STP Configuration.

Configure Switching Information

202

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Select the Spanning Tree Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether spanning tree operation is enabled on the switch.

7. Use Force Protocol Version to specify the Force Protocol Version parameter for the

switch.

The options are IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, PVST, and RPVST.

8. Use Configuration Name to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently

being used.

It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

9. Use Configuration Revision Level to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration

currently being used.

The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value is 0.

10. Select the Forward BPDU while STP Disabled Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded or not while spanning-tree is

disabled on the switch.

11. Select the BPDU Guard Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the BPDU guard feature is enabled. The STP BPDU guard allows

a network administrator to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology

consistent and predictable. The switches behind the edge ports with STP BPDU guard

enabled do not influence the overall STP topology. At the reception of BPDUs, the BPDU

guard operation disables the port that is configured with this option and transitions the

port into disable state. This would lead to an administrative disable of the port.

12. Select the BPDU Filter Disable or Enable radio button.

Configure Switching Information

203

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

This specifies whether the BPDU Filter feature is enabled. STP BPDU filtering applies to

all operational edge ports. Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected

to hosts that typically drop BPDUs. If an operational edge port receives a BPDU, it

immediately loses its operational status. In that case, if BPDU filtering is enabled on this

port then it drops the BPDUs received on this port.

13. Select the e Fast Backbone Mode Disable or Enable radio button. (PVSTP only.)

Use this option to choose a new indirect link when an indirect link fails. The system does

not ignore inferior BPDUs, as is done in 802.1d. Rather the system uses the BPDUs to

age out on the port it received the BPDUs. Later the system sends out root link queries

on other non-designated ports. Based on the replies, if there is a positive response to at

least one of them, it chooses a new indirect link. Fast Backbone mode is disabled by

default.

14. Select the Fast Uplink Mode Disable or Enable radio button. (PVSTP only.)

This option reduces the recovery time in selecting a new root port when the primary root

port goes down. Fast Uplink mode is disabled by default.

15. Use the Max Update Rate field to configure the Fast Uplink Maximum Update Rate.

This field is enabled for configuration when Fast Uplink mode is enabled. Allowed values

are 0 to 32000 packets per second. The default value is 150.

16. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.

Table 74. STP Configuration

Field Description

Configuration Digest Key Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.

Configuration Format Selector The version of the configuration format being used in the exchange of

BPDUs.

MST ID Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the

corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.

VID ID Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID

associated with each of them.

FID ID Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs

associated with each of them.

Configure Switching Information

204

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Advanced STP Settings

 To configure advanced STP settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Configuration.

6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether spanning tree operation is enabled on the switch. The default is

Enable.

7. Use Force Protocol Version to specify the Force Protocol Version parameter for the

switch.

The options are IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, PVST, and RPVST. The default

is IEEE 802.1w.

8. Use Configuration Name to specify the identifier used to identify the configuration currently

being used.

It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.

Configure Switching Information

205

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

9. Use Configuration Revision Level to specify the identifier used to identify the configuration

currently being used.

The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value is 0.

10. Select the Forward BPDU while STP Disabled Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded while spanning-tree is

disabled on the switch. The default is Disable.

11. Select the BPDU Guard Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the BPDU guard feature is enabled. The STP BPDU guard allows

a network administrator to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology

consistent and predictable. The switches behind the edge ports with STP BPDU guard

enabled do not influence the overall STP topology. At the reception of BPDUs, the BPDU

guard operation disables the port that is configured with this option and transitions the

port into disable state. This would lead to an administrative disable of the port.

12. Select the BPDU Filter Disable or Enable radio button.

This specifies whether the BPDU Filter feature is enabled. STP BPDU filtering applies to

all operational edge ports. Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected

to hosts that typically drop BPDUs. If an operational edge port receives a BPDU, it

immediately loses its operational status. In that case, if BPDU filtering is enabled on this

port then it drops the BPDUs received on this port.

13. Select the Fast Backbone Mode Disable or Enable radio button. (PVSTP only.)

Use this option to choose a new indirect link when an indirect link fails. The system does

not ignore inferior BPDUs, as is done in 802.1d. Rather the system uses the BPDUs to

age out on the port it received the BPDUs. Later the system sends out root link queries

on other non-designated ports. Based on the replies, if there is a positive response to at

least one of them, it chooses a new indirect link. Fast Backbone mode is disabled by

default.

14. Select the Fast Uplink Mode Disable or Enable radio button. (PVSTP only.)

This option reduces the recovery time in selecting a new root port when the primary root

port goes down. Fast Uplink mode is disabled by default.

15. Use the Max Update Rate field to configure the Fast Uplink Maximum Update Rate.

This field is enabled for configuration when Fast Uplink mode is enabled. Allowed values

are 0 to 32000 packets per second. The default value is 150.

16. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

206

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure CST Settings

You can configure Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on the switch.

 To configure CST settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Configuration.

Table 75. STP Configuration

Field Description

Configuration Digest Key The 16-byte signature of type HMAC-MD5 created from the MST

Configuration Table (a VLAN ID-to-MST ID mapping) which is used to

identify the configuration currently being used.

Configuration Format Selector The version of the configuration format being used in the exchange of

BPDUs.

STP Status

MST ID Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the

corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.

VID ID Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID

associated with each of them.

FID ID Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs

associated with each of them.

Configure Switching Information

207

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Specify values for CST in the appropriate fields:

• Bridge Priority. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a

priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes

the root bridge. Specifies the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST). The valid range is 0–61440. The bridge priority is a multiple of

4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically

set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if the priority is

attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095, it is set to 0. The default priority

is 32768.

• Bridge Max Age (secs). The bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits

before implementing a topological change. The valid range is 6–40, and the value

must be less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or

equal to 2 * (Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.

• Bridge Hello Time (secs). The bridge hello time for the Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the amount of time in seconds a root bridge

waits between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds. The value

must be less than or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) - 1. The default hello time value is

• Bridge Forward Delay (secs). The bridge forward delay time, which indicates the

amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before

forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1.

The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.

Configure Switching Information

208

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

• Spanning Tree Maximum Hops. The maximum number of bridge hops the

information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The valid

range is 6–40. The default is 20 hops.

• Spanning Tree Tx Hold Count. Configures the maximum number of bpdus the bridge

is allowed to send within the hello time window. The valid range is 1–10. The default

value is 6.

7. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the CST Status information that is displayed.

Configure CST Port Settings

You can configure the Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on a

specific port on the switch.

A port can become Diagnostically Disabled (D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe

error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU

flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a

3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.

Table 76. STP Advanced CST Configuration

Field Description

Bridge identifier The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority

and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Time since topology change The time in seconds since the topology of the CST last changed.

Topology change count Number of times topology changed for the CST.

Topology change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if

a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST. It

takes a value if True or False.

Designated root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Root Path Cost Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST.

Root Port Identifier Port to access the Designated Root for the CST.

Max Age(secs) Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST.

Forward Delay(secs) Derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay parameter.

Hold Time(secs) Minimum time between transmission of Configuration BPDUs.

CST Regional Root Priority and base MAC address of the CST Regional Root.

CST Path Cost Path Cost to the CST tree Regional Root.

Configure Switching Information

209

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

 To configure CST port settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Configuration.

6. Select an interface.

You can select a physical or port channel interface associated with VLANs associated

with the CST.

7. Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the CST.

The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if the priority is attempted to be set

to any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If it is tried to be set to any value between 16

and (2*16-1) it is set to 16 and so on. The default value is 128.

8. Use Admin Edge Port to specify if the specified port is an Edge Port within the CIST.

Use the menu to select Disable or Enable. The default value is Disable.

9. Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the

common and internal spanning tree.

It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000. The default is 0.

10. Use External Port Path Cost to set the External Path Cost to a new value for the specified

port in the spanning tree.

It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000. The default is 0.

11. Use BPDU Filter to configure the BPDU Filter, which filters the BPDU traffic on this port

when STP is enabled on this port.

The possible values are Enable or Disable. The default value is Disable.

12. Use BPDU Flood to configure the BPDU Flood, which floods the BPDU traffic arriving on

this port when STP is disabled on this port.

Configure Switching Information

210

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The possible values are Enable or Disable. The default value is Disable.

13. Use Auto Edge to configure the auto edge mode of a port, which allows the port to become

an edge port if it does not see BPDUs for some duration.

The possible values are Enable or Disable. The default value is Enable.

14. Use Root Guard to configure the root guard mode, which sets a port to discard any superior

information received by the port and thus protect against root of the device from changing.

The port gets put into discarding state and does not forward any packets. The possible

values are Enable or Disable. The default value is Disable.

15. Use Loop Guard to enable or disable the loop guard on the port to protect Layer 2

forwarding loops.

If loop guard is enabled, the port moves into the STP loop inconsistent blocking state

instead of the listening/learning/forwarding state. The default value is Disable

16. Use TCN Guard to configure the TCN guard for a port restricting the port from propagating

any topology change information received through that port.

The possible values are Enable or Disable. The default value is Disable.

17. Use Port Mode to enable or disable Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative mode

associated with the port or port channel.

The possible values are Enable or Disable. The default value is Disable.

18. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 77. CST Port Configuration

Field Description

Auto Calculated Port Path Cost Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or

not (Disabled). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the

port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.

Hello Timer The value of the parameter for the CST.

Auto Calculated External Port Path

Cost

Displays whether the external path cost is automatically calculated

(Enabled) or not (Disabled). External Path cost is calculated based on

the link speed of the port if the configured value for External Port Path

Cost is zero.

BPDU Guard Effect Display the BPDU Guard Effect, it disables the edge ports that receive

BPDU packets. The possible values are Enable or Disable.

Port Forwarding State The Forwarding State of this port.

Configure Switching Information

211

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View CST Port Status

You can view the Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific

port on the switch.

 To view the CST port status:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Status.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

Configure Switching Information

212

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the page.

Table 78. CST Port Status

Field Description

Interface Identify the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs

associated with the CST.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the CST. It is made up

from the port priority and the interface number of the port.

Port Forwarding State The Forwarding State of this port.

Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each

spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root Port,

Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master Port or

Disabled Port.

Designated Root Root Bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the

base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.

Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port. It is made up

using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to

the LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of

the port.

Topology Change Acknowledge Identifies whether the topology change acknowledgement flag is set for

the next BPDU to be transmitted for this port. It is either True or False.

Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. It takes the value

Enabled or Disabled.

Point-to-point MAC Derived value of the point-to-point status.

CST Regional Root Bridge Identifier of the CST Regional Root. It is made up using the

bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

CST Path Cost Path Cost to the CST Regional Root.

Port Up Time Since Counters Last

Cleared

Time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in Days, Hours,

Minutes, and Seconds.

Loop Inconsistent State This parameter identifies whether the port is in loop inconsistent state

or not.

Transitions Into Loop Inconsistent

State

The number of times this interface transitioned into loop inconsistent

state.

Transitions Out Of Loop

Inconsistent State

The number of times this interface transitioned out of loop inconsistent

state.

Configure Switching Information

213

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure MST Settings

You can configure Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) on the switch.

 To configure an MST instance:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration.

6. To add a new MST, do the following:

a. Configure the MST values,

• MST ID. Specify the ID of the MST to create. The valid values for this are 1 to

4094. This is only visible when the select option of the MST ID select box is

selected.

• Priority. The bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are

running STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with

the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple

of 4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is

automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example,

if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095, it is set to 0.

The default priority is 32768.The valid range is 0–61440.

• VLAN ID. This gives a combo box of each VLAN on the switch. These can be

selected or unselected for re-configuring the association of VLANs to MST

instances.

b. Click the Add button

This creates the new MST that you configured.

7. To modify an MST instance, do the following:

a. Select the check box next to the instance.

You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports.

Configure Switching Information

214

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

b. Update the values.

c. click the Apply button.

8. To delete an MST instance, do the following:

a. Select the check box for the instance.

b. Click the Delete button.

For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the

page.

View the Spanning Tree MST Port Status

You can configure and display Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) settings on a specific port on

the switch.

A port can become Diagnostically Disabled (D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe

error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU

flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a

3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.

 To view the Spanning Tree MST port status:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Table 79. MST Configuration

Field Description

Bridge Identifier The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using

the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Time Since Topology Change The time n seconds since the topology of the selected MST instance

last changed.

Topology Change Count Number of times topology changed for the selected MST instance.

Topology Change The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if

a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected

MST instance. It takes a value if True or False.

Designated Root The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge

priority and the base MAC address of the bridge

Root Path Cost Path Cost to the Designated Root for this MST instance.

Root PortIdentifier Port to access the Designated Root for this MST instance.

Configure Switching Information

215

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Port Status.

Note: If no MST instances were configured on the switch, the page displays

a No MSTs Available message and does not display the fields shown

in the field description table that follows.

6. Use MST ID to select one MST instance from existing MST instances.

7. Use Interface to select one of the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs

associated with the selected MST instance.

8. Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the selected MST

instance.

The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if the priority is attempted to be set

to any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If it is tried to be set to any value between 16

and (2*16-1) it is set to 16 and so on.

9. Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected

MST instance.

It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

216

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the read-only MST port configuration information displayed on

the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page.

View STP Statistics

You can view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs)

transmitted and received on each port.

 To view Spanning Tree statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Table 80. MST Port Status

Field Description

Auto Calculated Port Path Cost Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enable) or

not (Disable). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the

port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.

Port ID The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST

instance. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of

the port.

Port Uptime Since Last Clear

Counters

Time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in Days, Hours,

Minutes, and Seconds.

Port Mode Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative mode associated with the port

or port channel. The possible values are Enable or Disable.

Port Forwarding State The Forwarding State of this port.

Port Role Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each

spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root Port,

Designated Port, Alternate Port, Backup Port, Master Port or

Disabled Port.

Designated Root Root Bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the

bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.

Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port. It is made up

using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.

Designated Port Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to

the LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of

the port.

Configure Switching Information

217

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Statistics.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the information available on the STP Statistics page.

Configure PVST VLAN Settings

You can view and configure Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol (PVST)/Per VLAN Rapid

Spanning Tree Protocol (RPVST) VLAN settings for the device.

 To configure PVST/RPVST VLAN settings for the device:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Table 81. STP Statistics

Field Description

Interface Selects one of the physical or port channel interfaces of the switch.

STP BPDUs Received Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port.

STP BPDUs Transmitted Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Received Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

MSTP BPDUs Received Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.

MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.

Configure Switching Information

218

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > PVST VLAN in the navigation menu.

6. Select a VLAN ID, a unique VLAN identifier, from the list of VLANs with enabled STP Admin

mode and PVST or RPVST.

7. In the Root list, select None, Primary, or Secondary.

The default value is None. This setting configures the switch to become the root bridge or

standby root bridge by modifying the bridge priority from the default value of 32768 to a

lower value calculated to ensure the bridge is the root (or standby) bridge.

8. In the Hello Time field, configure the spanning tree hello time interval for the specified

VLAN

The hello time is the interval between sending successive BPDUs. Allowed values range

from 1 to 10 seconds. The default value is 2 seconds.

9. In the Forward Time field, configure the spanning tree forward delay time for a specified

VLAN.

The range is 4 to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds. This interval is a time for

listening and learning states before transitioning a port to the forwarding state.

10. Use the Max Age field to configure the spanning tree maximum age time for a specified

VLAN.

Max age is the maximum age time before a bridge port saves its configuration

information. The range is 6 to 40 seconds. The default value is 20 seconds.

11. Configure the bridge Priority of a VLAN.

Configure Switching Information

219

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The allowed values are between 0 and 61440. The valid values are listed in the following

table.

The default value is 32768. If the value configured is not among the specified values,

then it is rounded off to the nearest valid value.

12. Click the Add button.

PVST/RPVST is enabled for the selected VLAN.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure the PVST Interface Settings

You can view and configure Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol (PVST)/Per VLAN Rapid

Spanning Tree Protocol (RPVST) Interface settings for the device.

 To configure the PVST/RPVST Interface settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > PVST Interface.

Table 82. PVST/RPVST VLAN Configuration - VLAN Bridge Priority

0 4096 8192

12288 16384 20480

24576 28672 32768 (default)

36864 40960 45056

49152 53248 57344

61440

Configure Switching Information

220

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Select a VLAN ID from the list of VLANs with enabled STP Admin mode and PVST or

RPVST.

Note: The Other option is used for configuring a VLAN which is not yet

created. Specify the required value for VLAN ID and click the Apply

button to observe actual values.

7. Configure the Priority value used to allow the operator to select the relative importance of

the port in the selection process for forwarding.

Set this value to a lower number to prefer a port for forwarding of frames. This priority

configuration is used when the port is configured as a point-to-point link type. The allowed

values are between 0 and 240. The priority values are listed in the following table. All

other values are rounded off. The default value is 128.

Note: The value must be a multiple of 16.

8. The Per VLAN Cost is the path cost from the port to the root bridge.

The values allowed are between 1 and 200,000,000. By default, cost is not configured.

Use the value 0 to unconfigure the setting. If per VLAN cost is not configured, the path

cost value is set based on Link Speed.

Table 83. PVST/RPVST Interface Configuration Priority Values

01632

48 64 80

96 112 128 (default)

144 160 176

192 208 224

240 – –

Configure Switching Information

221

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that the PVST/RPVST Interface

Configuration page displays.

View PVST Statistics

You can view and configure Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol (PVST)/Per VLAN Rapid

Spanning Tree Protocol (RPVST) Statistics settings for the device.

 To view the PVST/RPVST statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > PVST Statistics.

Table 84. PVST/RPVST Interface Configuration

Field Description

Interface The list of physical interfaces and LAGs.

Role Indicates the role of the interface. Possible values are as follows:

Disabled, Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup, and Master.

Note: The blank field is displayed for the interface which is

not included for the specified VLAN.

Status Indicates the status of the interface. Possible values are as follows:

Discarding, Learning, Forwarding, and Disabled.

Note: The blank field is displayed for the interface which is

not included for the specified VLAN.

Configure Switching Information

222

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The Status field displays Neither PVST nor Rapid-PVST is enabled. If you change the

STP mode to PVST or to RPVST, the page displays statistic information.

Multicast

Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups are identified by

class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

View the MFDB Table

The Multicast Forwarding Database holds the port membership information for all active

multicast address entries. The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC address pair.

Entries can contain data for more than one protocol.

 To view the MFDB Table:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Table.

Configure Switching Information

223

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use Search by MAC Address to enter a MAC address.

Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example

00:01:23:43:45:67.

7. Click the GO button.

If the address exists, that entry is displayed. An exact match is required.

View the MFDB Statistics

 To view the MFDB statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

Table 85. MFDB Table

Field Description

MAC Address The multicast MAC address for which you requested data.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.

Type This displays the type of the entry. Static entries are those that are

configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a

result of a learning process or protocol.

Component This is the component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast

Forwarding Database. Possible values are IGMP snooping, GMRP,

Static Filtering and MLD snooping.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are

Management Configured, Network Configured and Network Assisted.

Forwarding Interfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the

forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as the

static filtering interfaces.

Configure Switching Information

224

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Statistics.

The following table describes the MFDB Statistics fields.

IGMP Snooping

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is a feature that allows a switch to

forward multicast traffic intelligently on the switch. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined

to a host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from

224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch

forwards traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch

from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.

A traditional Ethernet network can be separated into different network segments to prevent

placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these

segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the

switch forwards a copy into each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the

IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes

connected to the network.

This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be seen or processed by

all connected nodes. In the case of multicast packets, however, this approach could lead to

less efficient use of network bandwidth, particularly when the packet is intended for only a

small number of nodes. Packets are flooded into network segments where no node is

receptive to the packet. While nodes rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets

addressed to unrequested group addresses, they cannot transmit new packets onto the

shared media for the period of time that the multicast packet is flooded. The problem of

Table 86. MFDB Statistics

Field Description

Max MFDB Table Entries The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding

Database table can hold.

Most MFDB Entries Since Last

Reset

The largest number of entries that were present in the Multicast

Forwarding Database table since last reset. This value is also known as

the MFDB high-water mark.

Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database

table.

Configure Switching Information

225

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

wasting bandwidth is even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for example in

full-duplex links.

Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets is a creative effort to solve this problem. The

switch uses the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded throughout the

network to determine which segments receive packets directed to the group address.

Configure IGMP Snooping

You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists

for multicast traffic.

Note: You must log in as the admin user, which has read/write access

privileges to change the data on this page.

 To configure IGMP snooping:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Configuration.

6. Select the Admin mode Enable or Disable radio button.

Configure Switching Information

226

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

This specifies the administrative mode for IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is

Disable.

7. Use the Validate IGMP IP header option to Enable or Disable header validation for all

IGMP versions.

If Validate IGMP IP Header is enabled, then IGMP IP header checks for Router Alert

option, ToS and TTL. The default value is Enable.

8. Select the Proxy Querier Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This enables or disables IGMP proxy querier on the system. If disabled, then the IGMP

proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to IGMP leave packet. the

default value is Enable.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics

on the page.

Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces

 To configure IGMP snooping for interfaces:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Interface Configuration.

Table 87. IGMP Snooping Configuration

Field Description

Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU.

Interfaces Enabled for IGMP

Snooping

A list of all the interfaces currently enabled for IGMP snooping.

VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP

Snooping

Displays VLAN IDs enabled for IGMP snooping.

Configure Switching Information

227

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The page lists all physical, VLAN, and LAG interfaces.

6. Use the Interface check boxes to select interfaces.

7. In the Admin Mode field, select Disable or Enable.

This specifies the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP snooping for the

switch. The default is Disable.

8. Use Group Membership Interval to specify the amount of time the switch waits for a report

for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.

Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.

9. Use Max Response Time to specify the amount of time the switch waits after sending a

query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that

interface.

Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the Group Membership Interval in

seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the Group

Membership Interval.

10. Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time the switch waits to receive a

query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers

attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero

indicates an infinite time-out, i.e. no expiration.

11. Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to select the fast leave mode for a particular interface.

The default is Disable.

12. Use Proxy Querier Mode to select the proxy querier mode for a particular interface.

If it is disabled, then IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to

IGMP leave packet. The default value is Enable.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

228

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs

 To configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP VLAN Configuration.

6. To enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN, do the following:

a. Enter the VLAN ID.

b. Configure the IGMP snooping values:

• Use Admin Mode to enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

• Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave

mode for the specified VLAN ID.

• Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of

IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is Maximum Response

Time + 1 to 3600 seconds.

• Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for maximum response time of

IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 1 to Group

Membership Interval - 1. Its value must be greater than group membership

interval value.

• Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for multicast router expiry time

of IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 0 to 3600

seconds.

• Use Report Suppression Mode to enable or disable IGMP snooping report

suppression mode for the specified VLAN ID. IGMP snooping report suppression

allows the suppression of the IGMP reports sent by the multicast hosts by building

a Layer 3 membership table, thereby sending only the very needed reports to the

IGMP Routers to receive the multicast traffic. As a result, the multicast report

traffic being sent to the IGMP Routers is reduced.

Configure Switching Information

229

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

• Enable or Disable the Proxy Querier Mode for the specified VLAN ID. If proxy

querier mode is disabled, then IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not

sent in response to an IGMP leave packet. The default is Enable.

c. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

7. To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN, do the following:

a. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.

b. Click the Delete button.

The VLAN is removed from the list.

8. To modify the IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN:

a. Select the check box next to the VLAN ID

b. Update the values

c. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure a Multicast Router

You can configure the interface as the one the multicast router is attached to. All IGMP

packets snooped by the switch are forwarded to the multicast router reachable from this

interface. The configuration is not needed most of the time since the switch automatically

detects the multicast router and forwards IGMP packets accordingly. It is needed only if you

want to make sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in

a complex network.

 To configure a multicast router:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration.

Configure Switching Information

230

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use Interface to select the physical interface.

7. In the Multicast Router field, select Enable or Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure a Multicast Router VLAN

You can configure an interface to forward the snooped IGMP packets from a specific VLAN

only to the multicast router that is connected to the interface. The configuration is not needed

most of the time since the switch automatically detects a multicast router and forwards the

IGMP packets accordingly. It is needed only when you want to make sure that the multicast

router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.

 To configure a multicast router VLAN:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN

Configuration.

Configure Switching Information

231

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use Interface to select the interface.

7. Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID.

8. In the Multicast Router field, select Enable or Disable.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

IGMP Snooping Querier Overview

IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end-devices

on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP

querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with

the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not

receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it stops forwarding multicasts to

the port where the end device is located.

You can configure and display information on IGMP snooping queriers on the network and,

separately, on VLANs.

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier

You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping querier. Only a user with read/write

access privileges can change the data on this page.

 To configure IGMP snooping querier settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Configure Switching Information

232

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Querier Configuration.

6. Use Querier Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for IGMP snooping for the

switch.

The default is Disable.

7. In the Snooping Querier IP Address field, type an IP address.

This specifies the snooping querier address to be used as the source address in periodic

IGMP queries. This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on

which query is being sent.

8. Use IGMP Version to specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.

The range is 1 to 2. The default value is 2.

9. Use Query Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries

sent by the snooping querier.

The query Interval must be a value in the range of 1 and 1800. The default value is 60.

10. Use Querier Expiry Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds after which the

last querier information is removed.

The querier expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 and 300. The default value

is 125.

11. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The page displays the VLAN IDs enabled for IGMP snooping querier.

Configure Switching Information

233

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs

You can configure IGMP queriers for use with VLANs on the network.

 To configure querier VLAN settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration.

6. To create a new VLAN ID for IGMP snooping, select New Entry from the VLAN ID field and

complete the following fields.

You can also set pre-configurable snooping querier parameters.

• VLAN ID. The VLAN ID for which the IGMP snooping querier is to be enabled.

• Querier Election Participate Mode. Enable or disable querier Participate mode.

- Disabled. Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the

snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.

- Enabled. The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the least

IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

• Snooping Querier VLAN Address. Specify the snooping querier IP address to be

used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN.

7. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

234

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure MLD Snooping

You can configure the parameters for MLD snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists

for multicast traffic. Only a user with read/write access privileges can change the data on this

page.

 To configure MLD snooping:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Configuration.

Table 88. Querier VLAN Configuration

Field Description

Operational State The operational state of the IGMP snooping querier on a VLAN. It can

be in any of the following states:

• Querier: The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The

snooping switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval

equal to the configured querier query interval. If the snooping

switch finds a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier

mode.

• Non-Querier: The snooping switch is innNon-querier mode in the

VLAN. If the querier expiry interval timer expires, the snooping

switch moves into querier mode.

• Disabled: The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN.

The snooping querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP

snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier

address is not configured or the network management address is

also not configured.

Operational Version The operational IGMP protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on

the VLAN.

Last Querier Version The IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was

snooped on the VLAN.

Operational Max Response Time Displays maximum response time to be used in the queries that are

sent by the snooping querier.

Configure Switching Information

235

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use MLD Snooping Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD snooping for

the switch. The default is Disable.

7. Select the Proxy Querier Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This enables or disables an MLD proxy querier on the system. If it is disabled, then an

MLD proxy query with source IP 0::0 is not sent in response to an MLD leave packet. If it

is enabled, then MLD proxy queries are sent. The default value is Enable.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable MLD Snooping Configuration fields.

Table 89. MLD Snooping Configuration

Field Definition

Multicast Control Frame Count The number of multicast control frames that have been processed by

the CPU.

Interfaces Enabled for MLD

Snooping

One or more interfaces on which MLD snooping is administratively

enabled. MLD snooping must be enabled globally and on an interface

for the interface to be able to snoop MLD packets to determine which

segments should receive multicast packets directed to the group

address.

VLAN IDs Enabled For MLD

Snooping

Displays one or more VLANs on which MLD snooping is

administratively enabled.

Configure Switching Information

236

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure a MLD Snooping Interface

 To configure a MLD snooping interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Interface Configuration.

All physical, VLAN, and LAG interfaces are displayed.

6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:

• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on

the Go button.

• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to

configure

All physical, VLAN, and LAG interfaces are listed in the Interface column.

7. Use Admin Mode to select the interface mode for the selected interface for MLD snooping

for the switch. The default is Disable.

8. Use Group Membership Interval(secs) to specify the amount of time you want the switch

to wait for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that

interface from the group.

The valid range is from 2 to 3600 seconds. The configured value must be greater than

Max Response Time. The default is 260 seconds.

9. Use Max Response Time (secs) to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait

after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular

group on that interface.

Configure Switching Information

237

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Enter a value greater than or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in

seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group

membership interval.

10. Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait to

receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast

routers attached.

Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero

indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.

11. Fast Leave Admin Mode is the administrative mode of Fast Leave on the interface.

If Fast Leave is enabled, the interface can be immediately removed from the Layer 2

forwarding table entry upon receiving an MLD leave message for a multicast group

without first sending out MAC-based general queries. The default is Disable.

12. Select Enable or Disable for the Proxy Querier Mode for a particular interface.

If the mode is disabled, an MLD proxy query with source IP 0::0 is not sent in response to

an MLD leave packet. If the mode is enabled, MLD proxy queries are sent. The default

value is Enable.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure MLD VLAN Settings

 To configure MLD VLAN settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration.

Configure Switching Information

238

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use VLAN ID to set the VLAN IDs for which MLD snooping is enabled.

7. Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the MLD snooping Fast Leave Mode for

the specified VLAN ID.

8. Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of MLD

snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is (Maximum Response Time + 1) to 3600.

9. Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for the maximum response time of MLD

snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 1 to (Group Membership Interval –1). Its value must be less than group

membership interval value.

10. Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for the multicast router expiry time of

MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID.

The valid range is 0 to 3600.

11. Select the Proxy Querier Mode for the specified VLAN ID from the menu.

If you select Disable, then MLD proxy query with source IP 0::0 is not sent in response to

an MLD leave packet. The default value is Enable.

12. Click Add to enable MLD Snooping on the specified VLAN.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

239

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Enable or Disable a Multicast Router on an Interface

 To enable or disable a multicast router on an interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want to enable or disable the

multicast router configuration.

7. From the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Multicast Router VLAN Settings

 To configure multicast router VLAN settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Configure Switching Information

240

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN Configuration.

6. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want to enable or disable the

multicast router configuration.

7. Use the VLAN ID field to specify the VLAN ID for which you want to enable or disable the

multicast router configuration.

8. Form the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure MLD Snooping Querier

You can configure the parameters for an MLD snooping querier. Only a user with read/write

access privileges can change the data on this page.

 To configure an MLD snooping querier:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier Configuration.

Configure Switching Information

241

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use Querier Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD snooping for the

switch. The default is Disable.

7. Use Querier Address to specify the snooping querier address to be used as source

address in periodic MLD queries.

This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which query is being

sent. The supported IPv6 formats are x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x and x::x.

8. Use MLD Version to specify the MLD protocol version used in periodic MLD queries.

9. Use Query Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries

sent by the snooping querier.

The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 to 1800. The default value is 60.

10. Use Querier Expiry Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds after which the

last querier information is removed.

The querier expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 to 300. The default value is

60. The page displays VLAN IDs enabled for the MLD snooping querier.

11. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

242

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings

 To configure MLD snooping querier VLAN settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration.

6. Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID on which the MLD snooping querier is administratively

enabled and a VLAN exists in the VLAN database.

7. Use Querier Election Participate Mode to enable or disable the MLD snooping querier

participation in election mode.

When this mode is disabled, on detecting another querier of same version in the VLAN,

the snooping querier moves to a non-querier state. When this mode is enabled, the

snooping querier participates in querier election where the lowest IP address wins the

querier election and operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to

non-querier state.

8. Use Querier VLAN Address to specify the snooping querier address to be used as the

source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN.

9. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

243

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure MVR

You can configure basic, advanced, group, interface or group membership settings.

Configure Basic MVR Settings

 To configure basic MVR settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > MVR > Basic > MVR Configuration.

Table 90. Querier VLAN Configuration

Field Description

Operational State The operational state of the MLD snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in

any of the following states:

• Querier: Snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping

switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the

configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch sees a better

querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.

• Non-Querier: Snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN. If

the querier expiry interval timer is expired, the snooping switch moves

into querier mode.

• Disabled: Snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The

snooping querier moves to disabled mode when MLD snooping is not

operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured

or the network management address is also not configured.

Operational Version The operational MLD protocol version of the querier.

Last Querier Address The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the

VLAN.

Last Querier Version The MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was

snooped on the VLAN.

Operational Max Response Time Displays maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by

the snooping querier.

Configure Switching Information

244

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use MVR Running to Enable or Disable the MVR feature.

The factory default is Disable.

7. Use MVR Multicast VLAN to specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is received.

All source ports belong to this VLAN. The value can be set in a range of 1 to 4093. The

default value is 1.

8. Use MVR Global Query Response Time to set the maximum time to wait for the IGMP

reports membership on a receiver port.

This time applies only to receiver-port leave processing. When an IGMP query is sent

from a receiver port, the switch waits for the default or configured MVR query time for an

IGMP group membership report before removing the port from the multicast group

membership. The value is equal to the tenths of a second. The range is from 1 to 100

tenths. The factory default is 5 tenths or one-half.

9. Use MVR Mode to specify the MVR mode of operation.

Possible values are compatible or dynamic. The factory default is compatible.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 91. MVR Configuration

Field Definition

MVR Max Multicast Groups The maximum number of multicast groups that MVR supports.

MVR Current Multicast Groups Displays current number of the MVR groups allocated.

Configure Switching Information

245

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Advanced MVR Settings

 To configure advanced MVR settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Configuration.

6. Select the MVR Running Enable or Disable radio button.

The factory default is Disable.

7. Use the MVR Multicast VLAN to specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is

received.

All source ports belong to this VLAN. The value can be set in a range of 1 to 4094. The

default value is 1.

8. Use the MVR Global query response time to set the maximum time to wait for the IGMP

reports membership on a receiver port. This time applies only to receiver-port leave

processing. When an IGMP query is sent from a receiver port, the switch waits for the

default or configured MVR query time for an IGMP group membership report before

removing the port from the multicast group membership. The value is equal to the tenths of

second. The range is from 1 to 100 tenths. The factory default is 5 tenths or one-half.

9. Select a MVR Mode radio button to specify the MVR mode of operation.

The factory default is compatible.

10. Click the Apply button.

Configure Switching Information

246

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure an MVR Group

 To configure an MVR group:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Configuration.

6. Use the MVR Group IP to specify the IP address for the new MVR group.

7. Use the Count to specify the number of contiguous MVR groups.

This helps you to create multiple MVR groups through a single click of the Add button. If

the field is empty, then clicking the button creates only one new group. The field is

displayed as empty for each particular group. The range is from 1 to 256.

8. Click the Add button.

The MVR group is added.

Table 92. Advanced MVR Configuration

Field Definition

MVR Max Multicast Groups The maximum number of multicast groups that MVR supports.

MVR Current Multicast Groups Displays the current number of MVR groups allocated.

Configure Switching Information

247

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure an MVR Interface

 To configure an MVR interface:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Interface Configuration.

The status of each port displays.

6. Use Interface to select the interface.

7. Use Admin Mode to Enable or Disable MVR on a port.

The factory default is Disable.

8. Use Type to configure the port as an MVR receiver port or a source port.

The default port type is none.

9. Use Immediate Leave to Enable or Disable the Immediate Leave feature of the MVR on

a port.

Table 93. MVR Group Configuration

Field Definition

Status The status of the specific MVR group.

Members The list of ports that participate in the specific MVR group.

Configure Switching Information

248

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The factory default is Disable.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure MVR Group Membership

 To configure MVR group membership:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Membership.

6. Use the Group IP to specify the IP multicast address of the MVR group.

7. Use the Port List to view the configured list of members of the selected MVR group.

You can use this port list to add the ports you selected to this MVR group.

8. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

249

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View MVR Statistics

 To view MVR statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Statistics.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 94. MVR Statistics

Field Definition

IGMP Query Received The number of received IGMP queries.

IGMP Report V1 Received The number of received IGMP reports V1.

IGMP Report V2 Received The number of received IGMP reports V2.

IGMP Leave Received The number of received IGMP leaves.

IGMP Query Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP queries.

Configure Switching Information

250

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

MAC Address Table

You can view or configure the MAC Address Table. This table contains information about

unicast entries for which the switch has forwarding or filtering information. This information is

used by the transparent bridging function in determining how to propagate a received frame.

Search the MAC Address Table

 To search the MAC address table:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table> Basic > Address Table.

IGMP Report V1 Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP reports V1.

IGMP Report V2 Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP reports V2.

IGMP Leave Transmitted The number of transmitted IGMP leaves.

IGMP Packet Receive Failures The number of IGMP packet receive failures.

IGMP Packet Transmit Failures The number of IGMP packet transmit failures.

Table 94. MVR Statistics (continued)

Field Definition

Configure Switching Information

251

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use Search By to search for MAC addresses by MAC address, VLAN ID, or port:

• Searched by MAC Address. Select MAC Address, enter the 6-byte hexadecimal

MAC address in two-digit groups separated by colons, for example,

01:23:45:67:89:AB. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, that entry is

displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining (greater) MAC addresses. An

exact match is required.

• Searched by VLAN ID. Select VLAN ID, enter the VLAN ID, for example, 100. Then

click the Go button. If the address exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry

followed by the remaining (greater) MAC addresses.

• Searched by Port. Select Port, enter the port ID in Unit/Slot/Port format, for example,

2/1/1. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, the entry is displayed as the first

entry followed by the remaining (greater) MAC addresses.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval

You can set the address aging interval for the specified forwarding database.

 To set the address aging interval:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

Table 95. Basic Address Table

Field Description

Total MAC Address Displaying the number of total MAC addresses learned or configured.

MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or

filtering information. The format is a 6 byte MAC address that is

separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.

Port The port upon which this address was learned.

Status The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are as follows:

• Static. The value of the corresponding instance was added by the

system or a user and cannot be relearned.

• Learned. The value of the corresponding instance was learned,

and is being used.

• Management. The value of the corresponding instance is also the

value of an existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress.

Configure Switching Information

252

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table> Advanced > Dynamic Addresses.

6. Use Address Aging Timeout (seconds) to specify the time-out period in seconds for aging

out dynamically learned forwarding information.

IEEE 802.1D-1990 recommends a default of 300 seconds. The value can be specified as

any number between 10 and 1000000 seconds. The factory default is 300.

7. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure a Static MAC Address

 To configure a static MAC address:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Address Table> Advanced > Static MAC Address.

Configure Switching Information

253

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use Interface to select the physical interface/LAGs.

7. In the Static MAC Address field, type the MAC address.

8. Select the VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.

9. Take one of the following actions:

• Click the Add button.

The static MAC address is added to the switch.

• Click the Delete button.

The static MAC address deleted from the switch.

Port Settings

You can view and monitor the physical port information for the ports available on the switch.

Configure Port Settings

You can configure the physical interfaces on the switch.

 To configure port settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Ports > Port Configuration.

6. Use Port to select the interface.

7. Use STP Mode to select the Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode for the port or

LAG.

The possible values are as follows:

• Enable. Select this to enable the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port.

• Disable. Select this to disable the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port.

Configure Switching Information

254

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The default is Enable.

8. In the Admin Mode list, select Enable or Disable.

This sets the port control administrative mode.For the port to participate in the network,

you must select Enable. The factory default is Enable.

9. From the LACP Mode list, select Enable or Disable.

This selects the Link Aggregation Control Protocol administrative mode. The mode must

be enabled in order for the port to participate in link aggregation. The factory default is

Enable.

10. From the Auto-negotiation list, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies the auto-negotiation mode for this port. The default is Enable.

Note: After you change the auto-negotiation mode, the switch might be

inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

11. From the Speed list, select the speed value for the selected port.

Possible field values are as follows:

• Auto. All supported speeds.

• 100. 100 Mbits/second

• 10G. 10 Gbits/second.

The delimiter characters for setting different speed values are a comma (,), a period (.)

and a space ( ). For you to set the auto-negotiation speed, the auto-negotiation mode

must be set to Enable. The default is Auto.

Note: After you change the speed value, the switch might be inaccessible for

a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

12. From the Duplex Mode list, select the duplex mode for the selected port.

Possible values are as follows:

• Auto. Indicates that speed is set by the auto-negotiation process.

• Full. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in both

directions simultaneously.

• Half. Indicates that the interface supports transmission between the devices in only

one direction at a time.

The default is Auto.

Note: After you change the duplex mode, the switch might be inaccessible for

a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.

13. Use the Link Trap object to determine whether to send a trap when link status changes.

The factory default is enabled.

Configure Switching Information

255

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

14. Use Frame Size to specify the maximum Ethernet frame size the interface supports or is

configured to use, including Ethernet header, CRC, and payload.

The range is 1518 to 12288. The default maximum frame size is 1518.

15. Use Debounce Time to specify the timer value for port debouncing in a multiple of 100

milliseconds (msec) in the range to 100 to 5000.

The default debounce timer value is 0, which means that debounce is disabled.

16. From the Flow Control list, select to Enable or Disable IEEE 802.3 flow control.

The default is Disable. The switch does not send pause frames if the port buffers become

full. Flow control helps to prevent data loss when the port cannot keep up with the

number of frames being switched. When enabled, the switch can send a pause frame to

stop traffic on a port if the amount of memory used by the packets on the port exceeds a

preconfigured threshold and responds to pause requests from partner devices. The

paused port does not forward packets for the period of time specified in the pause frame.

When the pause frame time elapses, or the utilization returns to a specified low threshold,

the switch enables the port to again transmit frames. For LAG interfaces, flow control

mode is displayed as blank because flow control is not applicable.

17. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 96. Port Configuration

Field Description

Media Type The media type.

Port Type For normal ports this field is Normal. Otherwise the possible values are

as follows:

• Mirrored. The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic is

copied to the probe port.

• Probe. Use this port to monitor a mirrored port.

• Trunk Member. The port is a member of a link aggregation trunk.

Look at the LAG pages for more information.

Admin Status When the port’s admin mode is D-Disable, this field indicates the

reason. Possible reasons are as follows:

• STP. Spanning Tree Protocol violation.

• UDLD. UDLD protocol violation.

• XCEIVER. Unsupported SFP/SFP+ inserted.

Physical Status Indicates the port speed and duplex mode.

Link Status Indicates whether the link is up or down.

ifIndex The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.

Configure Switching Information

256

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Port Descriptions

 To configure and display the description for all ports in the device:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Ports > Port Description.

6. Use Port Description to enter the description string to be attached to a port.

It can be up to 64 characters in length.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 97. Port Description

Field Description

Port Selects the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.

MAC Address The physical address of the specified interface.

PortList Bit Offset The bit offset value that corresponds to the port when the MIB object

type PortList is used to manage in SNMP.

ifIndex The interface index associated with the port.

Configure Switching Information

257

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View Port Transceiver Information

You can view the trans\ceiver information for all fiber ports on the switch

 To view port transceiver information:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > Ports > Port Transceiver.

6. Select Unit ID to display physical ports of the selected unit or select All to display physical

ports of all units.

7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 98. Port Transceiver

Field Description

Port The interface for which data is to be displayed.

Vendor Name Vendor name of the SFP.

Link Length 50 μm Link length supported for 50 μm fiber.

Link Length 62, 5 μm Link length supported for 62, 5 μm fiber.

Serial Number Serial number of the SFP.

Part Number Part number of the SFP.

Nominal Bit Rate Nominal signalling rate for SFP.

Revision Vendor revision of the SFP.

Compliance Compliance of the SFP.

Configure Switching Information

258

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Link Aggregation Groups

Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port-channels, allow you to

combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the

aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load

sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. The LAG by default

becomes a member of the management VLAN.

A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must

participate in the same protocols. A static port-channel interface does not require a partner

system to be able to aggregate its member ports.

Static LAGs are supported. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, it neither

transmits nor receives LACPDUs.

Configure LAG Settings

You can group one or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group, which is also known as a port-channel. The switch treats the LAG as if it

were a single link.

 To configure LAG settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > LAG Configuration.

6. Use LAG Name to enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be

specified for you to create the LAG.

7. Use Admin Mode to select Enable or Disable.

Configure Switching Information

259

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that

form the LAG are not released. The factory default is Enable.

8. Use Hash Mode to select the load-balancing mode used on a port-channel (LAG).

Traffic is balanced on a port-channel (LAG) by selecting one of the links in the channel

over which to transmit specific packets. The link is selected by creating a binary pattern

from selected fields in a packet, and associating that pattern with a particular link:

• Src MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port. Source MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and

incoming port associated with the packet.

• Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port. Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and

incoming port associated with the packet.

• Src/Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port. Source/Destination MAC, VLAN,

EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet. Src/Dest MAC, VLAN,

EType, incoming port is the default.

• Src IP and Src TCP/UDP Port fields. Source IP and Source TCP/UDP fields of the

packet.

• Dest IP and Dest TCP/UDP Port fields. Destination IP and Destination TCP/UDP Port

fields of the packet.

• Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port Fields. Source/Destination IP and source/destination

TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.

• Enhanced hashing Mode. Features MODULO-N operation based on the number of

ports in the LAG, non-unicast traffic and unicast traffic hashing using a common hash

algorithm, excellent load balancing performance, and packet attributes selection

based on the packet type:

• For L2 packets, source and destination MAC address are used for hash

computation.

• For L3 packets, source IP, destination IP address, TCP/UDP ports are used.

9. Use STP Mode to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode

associated with the LAG.

The possible values are as follows:

• Disable. Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.

• Enable. Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.

10. Use Static Mode to select Enable or Disable.

When the LAG is enabled, it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs that is, the

member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it can receive are

dropped. The factory default is Disable.

11. Use Link Trap to specify whether to send a trap when the link status changes.

The factory default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.

12. Use Local Preference Mode to Enable or Disable the LAG interface’s local preference

mode.

The default is Disable.

Configure Switching Information

260

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

13. Click the Apply button.

The switch is updated with the values you entered. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Configure LAG Membership

You can select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link

aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a port-channel. The switch can treat the

port-channel as if it were a single link.

 To configure LAG membership:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> LAG > LAG Membership.

Table 99. LAG Configuration

Field Description

LAG Description Enter the description string to be attached to a LAG. It can be up to 64

characters in length.

LAG ID Identification of the LAG.

LAG State Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Configured Ports Indicate the ports that are members of this port-channel

Active Ports Indicates the ports that are actively participating in the port-channel.

Configure Switching Information

261

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use LAG ID to select the identification of the LAG.

7. Use LAG Name to enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.

You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be

specified for you to create the LAG.

8. Use LAG Description to enter the description string to be attached to a LAG.

It can be up to 64 characters in length.

9. Use Admin Mode to select Enable or Disable.

When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that

form the LAG are not released. The factory default is Enable.

10. Use Link Trap to specify whether to send a trap when the link status changes.

The factory default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.

11. Use STP Mode to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode

associated with the LAG.

The possible values are as follows:

• Disable. Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.

• Enable. Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.

12. Use Static Mode to select enable or disable.

When the LAG is enabled, it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs that is, the

member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it can receive are

dropped. The factory default is Disable.

13. Use Hash Mode to select the load-balancing mode used on a port-channel (LAG).

Traffic is balanced on a port-channel (LAG) by selecting one of the links in the channel

over which to transmit specific packets.

Configure Switching Information

262

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet, and

associating that pattern with a particular link:

• Src MAC,VLAN,EType,incoming port. Source MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming

port associated with the packet.

• Dest MAC,VLAN,EType,incoming port. Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and

incoming port associated with the packet.

• Src/Dest MAC,VLAN,EType,incoming port. Source/Destination MAC, VLAN,

EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet. This option is the default.

• Src IP and Src TCP/UDP Port fields. Source IP and Source TCP/UDP fields of the

packet.

• Dest IP and Dest TCP/UDP Port fields. Destination IP and Destination TCP/UDP Port

fields of the packet.

• Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port fields. Source/Destination IP and source/destination

TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.

• Enhanced Hashing Mode. Features MODULO-N operation based on the number of

ports in the LAG, non-unicast traffic and unicast traffic hashing using a common hash

algorithm, excellent load balancing performance, and packet attributes selection

based on the packet type:

- For L2 packets, source and destination MAC address are used for hash

computation.

- For L3 packets, source IP, destination IP address, TCP/UDP ports are used.

14. Use the Port Selection Table to select the ports as members of the LAG.

15. Click the Apply button.

The switch is updated with the values you entered. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Multiple Registration Protocol Overview

Like 802.1AS, Multiple Registration Protocol (MRP) is an audio video bridging (AVB) feature

that is available on some FASTPATH platforms. MVR is a base registration protocol that

enables devices running an MRP application to register attributes to other devices in a

network. MRP provides an application to register attributes such as bandwidth for a given AV

stream and MAC address information. It is used by various applications to propagate the

registration. Blade switches support the following MRP applications:

• Multiple MAC Registration Protocol (MMRP). MMRP allows for the propagation MAC

address information in the network, and allows for the registration and deregistration of

both individual MAC address information and group MAC address membership. End

stations can request to join or leave a multicast group, or to register an individual MAC

address with a specific VLAN. MAC address entries can be dynamically registered and

deregistered if MMRP is administratively enabled on the switch.

• Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP). MVRP registers VLANs in the network,

enabling automatic VLAN configuration on the switch. In a typical network, VLAN tagging

Configure Switching Information

263

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

is common. Many nodes require ingress traffic to be tagged with a specific VLAN ID, and

other nodes require egress traffic to be transmitted with a specific VLAN ID. With the use

of MVRP on both ingress and egress, no manual VLAN configuration is required to pass

tagged traffic through the network.

Note: MRP framework must be available and enabled in all intermediate

devices to ensure that the propagation of the attributes occurs

throughout the network.

With MRP, network attributes are declared, registered, withdrawn, and removed

completely dynamically without any user intervention. This dynamic nature is especially

useful in networks where the following is true:

- Network attributes are likely to change frequently, requiring reconfiguration of the

intermediate devices.

- Recipients of these attributes frequently increase or decrease in number.

- Each of these changes without a dynamic self-adjusting framework would require

constant attention from the network administrator.

Configure Global MRP Settings

You can configure global MRP settings for the switch.

 To configure global MRP settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > MRP > Basic > MRP Configuration.

Configure Switching Information

264

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Note: The fields available on the MRP Configuration page vary based on the

platform and its supported features.

6. Select the MVRP Mode Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies the global administrative mode of MVRP on the device. The default is

Disable.

Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) registers VLANs in the network, enabling

automatic VLAN configuration on the device. In a typical network, VLAN tagging is

common. Many nodes require ingress traffic to be tagged with a specific VLAN ID, and

other nodes require egress traffic to be transmitted with a specific VLAN ID. With the use

of MVRP on both ingress and egress, no manual VLAN configuration is required to pass

tagged traffic through the network.

7. Select the MMRP Enable or Disable radio button.

This specifies the global administrative mode of MMRP on the device. The default is

Disable.

Multiple MAC Registration Protocol (MMRP) allows the propagation of MAC address

information in the network, and allows for the registration and deregistration of both

individual MAC address information and group MAC address membership. End stations

can request to join or leave a multicast group, or to register an individual MAC address

with a specific VLAN. MAC address entries can be dynamically registered and

deregistered if MMRP is administratively enabled on the device.

8. Select the Periodic State Machine (MVRP) Enable or Disable radio button.

When enabled, the state machine can help limit the effect of topology changes and

reduce the number of protocol data units (PDUs) transmitted between devices. The

default is Disable.

9. Select the Periodic State Machine (MMRP) Enable or Disable radio button.

When enabled, the state machine can help limit the effect of topology changes and

reduce the number of protocol data units (PDUs) transmitted between devices. The

default is Disable.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

265

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure MRP Port Settings

You can configure the per-port MRP mode and timer settings. The timers control when and

how often various messages are transmitted on each interface.

 To configure MRP port settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> MRP > Advanced > Port Settings.

6. To configure one or more ports or LAGs, select the check box next to each port or LAG to

configure.

You can select multiple ports to apply the same settings to the selected interfaces.

7. In the MVRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies the administrative mode of Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) on

the interface. MVRP registers VLANs in the network, enabling automatic VLAN

configuration on the device.

8. In the MMRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable.

This specifies the administrative mode of Multiple MAC Registration Protocol (MMRP) on

the interface. MMRP allows the propagation of MAC address information in the network

and allows for the registration and deregistration of both individual MAC address

information and group MAC address membership.

9. Use the MRP Join Timer field to configure the amount of time in centiseconds to wait for

JoinIn messages from other MRV participants after the interface sends a Join message.

Configure Switching Information

266

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

If the amount of time specified in this field passes before the interface receives a JoinIn

message, the interface resends the Join message. The range is 10 to 100 centiseconds.

The default value is 20.

10. Use the MRP Leave Timer field to configure the amount of time in centiseconds to wait

before the interface deregisters attributes from other MRV participants.

If the interface receives Join messages from other participants before the Leave timer

expires, the attributes are not deregistered. The range is 20 to 600 centiseconds. The

default value is 300.

11. Use the MRP Leave All Timer field to configure the amount of time to wait, after the

interface starts the MRP registration process, before the participants refresh and

reregister their attributes.

The range is 200 to 6000 centiseconds. The default value is 2000.

12. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

View MMRP and Clear Statistics

You can view and clear information regarding the MMRP frames transmitted and received by

the switch and by each interface.

 To view and clear MMRP statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > MRP > Advanced > MMRP Statistics.

Configure Switching Information

267

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

7. To clear the statistics for one or more ports, do the following:

a. Select the check box next to the interface or interfaces.

b. Click the Clear button.

The statistics are cleared.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that the MMRP Global Statistics page

displays.

Table 100. MMRP Global Statistics

Field Description

Interface In the MMRP Statistics table, this field identifies the interface associated with

the rest of the data in the row.

Frames Received The number of MMRP frames that were received on the device or on the

particular interface.

Bad Header The number of MMRP frames with bad headers that were received on the

switch.

Bad Format The number of MMRP frames with bad PDUs body formats that were received

on the switch.

Frames Transmitted The number of MMRP frames that were transmitted on the switch.

Transmission Failures The number of MMRP frames that the switch failed to transmit.

Configure Switching Information

268

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View and Clear MVRP Statistics

You can view and clear information about the MVRP frames transmitted and received by the

switch and by each interface.

 To view and clear MVRP statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching > MRP > MVRP Statistics.

6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

7. To clear the statistics for one or more ports, do the following:

a. Select the check box next to the interface or interfaces.

b. Click the Clear button.

The statistics are cleared.

Configure Switching Information

269

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that the MVRP Global Statistics page

displays.

Loop Protection

Loop protection can detect physical and logical loops between Ethernet ports on a device.

About Loop Protection

Loops inside a network are costly because they consume resources and reduce the

performance of the network. Detecting loops manually can be cumbersome.

The switch can automatically identify loops in the network. You can enable loop protection

per port or globally.

If loop protection is enabled, the switch sends predefined protocol data unit (PDU) packets to

a Layer 2 multicast destination address (09:00:09:09:13:A6) on all ports for which the feature

is enabled. You can selectively disable PDU packet transmission for loop protection on

specific ports even while port loop protection is enabled. If the switch receives a packet with

the previously mentioned multicast destination address, the source MAC address in the

packet is compared with the MAC address of the switch. If the MAC address does not match,

the packet is forwarded to all ports that are members of the same VLAN, just like any other

multicast packet. The packet is not forwarded to the port from which it was received.

Table 101. MVRP Statistics

Field Description

Interface In the MVRP Statistics table, this field identifies the interface associated with

the rest of the data in the row.

Frames Received The number of MVRP frames that were received on the switch.

Bad Header The number of MVRP frames with bad headers that were received on the

switch.

Bad Format The number of MVRP frames with bad PDUs body formats that were received

on the switch.

Frames Transmitted The number of MVRP frames that were transmitted on the switch.

Transmission Failures The number of MVRP frames that the switch failed to transmit.

Message Queue Failures The number of messages that failed to be added to the queue.

Registration Failures The number of MVRP frames that failed to register on a device or particular

interface.

Configure Switching Information

270

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

If the source MAC address matches the MAC address of the switch, the switch can perform

one of the following actions, depending on how you configure the action:

• The port is shut down.

• A log message is generated. (If a syslog server is configured, the log message can be

sent to the syslog server.)

• The port is shut down and a log message is generated.

If loop protection is disabled, the multicast packet is silently dropped.

Loop protection is not intended for ports that serve as uplinks between spanning tree–aware

switches. Loop protection is designed for unmanaged switches that drop spanning tree

bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).

You need to enable the feature globally before you can enable it at the port level so that the

system policy filter can be installed.

Loop Protection and PDU Packet Transmission

Loop protection sends loop protocol packets from all ports on which it is enabled. You can

configure the interval (1 to 5 seconds) between two successive loop protection PDU packets.

The default interval is 5 seconds. If the switch receives a loop protocol packet on a port for

which the action is set to shut down the port, the port can no longer receive and send frames.

Loop protection operates at a port level, regardless of VLAN assignment and membership,

detecting loops across VLANs.

Loop Protection and Spanning Tree Protocol

Loop protection does not impact end nodes and is not intended for ports that serve as uplinks

between spanning tree–aware switches. Loop protection can coexist with Spanning Tree

Protocol (STP). You can enable both loop protection and STP on a port because these

features function independently of each other. STP does not bring a port down when a loop is

detected but keeps the port in blocking state. Because PDUs are allowed in a blocking state,

loop protection packets are received and loop protection brings down the port that is involved

in the loop (if the configured action is to shut down the port).

Configure the Global Loop Protection Settings

Before you can configure loop protection for individual ports (see Configure the Loop

Protection Settings for Ports and View the Loop Protection State on page 272), you must

globally enable and configure loop protection.

 To globally enable and configure loop protection:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

Configure Switching Information

271

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

6. In the Global L2 Loop Protection Configuration section, configure the following settings:

• Next to Admin Mode, select the Enable or Disable radio button to specify the

administrative mode of loop protection on the switch.

By default, loop protection is globally disabled.

• From the Transmit Interval menu, select the interval between the transmissions of

loop packets on a port.

The range is from 1 to 5 seconds. The default setting is 5 seconds. The selected

interval applies to all ports for which you enable loop protection.

• From the Max PDU Receive menu, select the maximum number of packets that a

port can receive before an action is taken.

The default setting is 1 packet. The selected number of packets applies to all ports for

which you enable loop protection.

7. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

Configure Switching Information

272

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure the Loop Protection Settings for Ports and View the

Loop Protection State

Before you can configure loop protection for individual ports, you must globally enable loop

protection (see Configure the Global Loop Protection Settings on page 270).

 To enable and configure loop protection for a port and view the loop protection state

on the switch:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Switching> L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration.

6. Select one of the following options to specify which ports are displayed on the page:

• Click LAG to show the list of all LAG interfaces.

• Click All to show the list of all physical ports as well as LAG interfaces.

7. Use one of the following methods to select a port:

• In the Go To Port field, enter the port in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go

button.

• Next to the Port column, select the check box for the port that you want to configure.

Configure Switching Information

273

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Note: You can select multiple ports. You can select all ports by selecting the

check box in the table header.

8. From the Keep Alive menu, select Enable to specify that loop protection must be enabled

on the port.

By default, loop protection is disabled for a port.

9. From the RX Action menu, select the action that the switch takes when a loop is detected

on the port:

• Log. Log the message when a loop is detected on the port.

• Disable. Disable the port when a loop is detected. This is the default setting.

• Both. Log and disable the port when a loop is detected.

10. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

11. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed on the page.

Table 102. Loop protection interface configuration information

Field Description

Loop Detected Indicates (Yes or No) whether a loop is detected on the port.

Loop Count The number of packets that were received on the port after the loop was detected.

Time Since Last Loop The time since the loop was detected.

Port Status The status of the port (Enabled or Disabled).

Auto Recovery Time Left The time that is left before the port is reenabled through the autorecovery process.

The time is in the range from 30 to 604800 seconds.

Errdisable Reason The reason that the port was disabled. In addition to being disabled because of loop

protection, the port can be disabled because of Unidirectional Link Detection

(UDLD), a broadcast storm, a unicast storm, and so on.

274

5. Routing

This chapter covers the following topics:

• Manage Routes

• Configure the Routing IP Settings

• Configure Routing Parameters for the Switch

• IPv6

• VLAN Overview

• Configure Address Resolution Protocol

• Configure RIP

• Configure Router Discovery

• Configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

Routing

275

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Manage Routes

The Routing Table collects routes from multiple sources: static routes and local routes. The

Routing Table can learn multiple routes to the same destination from multiple sources. The

Routing Table lists all routes.

Configure a Basic Route

 To configure a basic route:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> Routing Table > Basic > Route Configuration.

6. In the Route Type list, select one of the following route types.

• Default. To create a default route, all that must be specified is the next hop address,

and preference.

• Static. To create a static route, specify the network address, subnet mask, next hop

address, and preference.

• Static Reject. To create a static reject route, specify the network address, subnet

mask, and preference.

7. Network Address displays the IP route prefix for the destination.

8. Subnet Mask indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached

network.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask.

9. Next Hop IP Address displays the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic

to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.

Routing

276

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local

interface for a directly attached network.

10. Preference displays an integer value from 1 to 255.

You can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of an

individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest

preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the

preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less

preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls

whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same

destination.

11. Use Description to specify the description of this route that identifies the route.

Description must consist of alphanumeric, hyphen, or underscore characters and can be

up to 31 characters in length.

12. Click the Add button.

The static route is added to the switch.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable data that is displayed.

Table 103. Routing Table Basic Route Configuration

Field Description

Network Address The IP route prefix for the destination.

Subnet Mask Also referred to as the subnet/network mask, this indicates the portion

of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.

Protocol This field tells which protocol created the specified route. The

possibilities are one of the following:

• Local

• Static

Route Type This field can be Connected or Static or Dynamic based on the

protocol.

Next Hop Interface The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the

destination.

Next Hop Address The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the

next router (if any) in the path toward the destination. The next router is

always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local

interface for a directly attached network.

Routing

277

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Advanced Routes

 To configure advanced routes:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> Routing Table> Advanced > Route Configuration.

6. Use the Route Type field to specify Default or static reject route.

If you are creating a default route, all that must be specified is the next hop IP address;

otherwise, each field must be completed.

7. Network Address displays the IP route prefix for the destination.

Preference The preference is an integer value from (0 to 255). The user can

specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative

distance) of an individual static route. Among routes to the same

destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route

entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a

static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less

preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference

also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other

static routes to the same destination.

Metric Administrative cost of the path to the destination. If no value is entered,

default is 1. The range is 0–255.

Table 103. Routing Table Basic Route Configuration (continued)

Field Description

Routing

278

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

8. Subnet Mask indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached

network.

This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask.

9. Next Hop IP Address displays the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic

to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.

The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local

interface for a directly attached network.

10. Preference displays an integer value from 1 to 255.

You can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of an

individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest

preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the

preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less

preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls

whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same

destination.

11. Use Description to specify the description of this route that identifies the route.

The description must consist of alphanumeric, hyphen or underscore characters and can

be up to 31 characters in length.

12. Click the Add button.

The static route is added to the switch.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 104. Route Configuration - Learned Routes

Field Description

Network Address The IP route prefix for the destination.

Subnet Mask Also referred to as the subnet/network mask, this indicates the portion

of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.

Protocol This field tells which protocol created the specified route. The

possibilities are one of the following:

• Local

• Static

Route Type This field can be either default or static.

Next Hop Interface The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the

destination.

Next Hop IP Address The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the

next router (if any) in the path toward the destination. The next router is

always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local

interface for a directly attached network.

Routing

279

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Specify Route Preferences

You can configure the default preference for each protocol, for example, 60 for static routes,

120 for RIP. These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of

route metrics. Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest path known

to the protocol, independent of any other protocol.

The best route to a destination is chosen by selecting the route with the lowest preference

value. When there are multiple routes to a destination, the preference values are used to

determine the preferred route. If there is still a tie, the route with the best route metric is

chosen. To avoid problems with mismatched metrics (such as RIP and Open Shortest Path

First [OSPF] metrics, which are not directly comparable) you must configure different

preference values for each of the protocols.

 To specify route preferences

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> Routing Table > Advanced > Route Preferences.

Preference The preference is an integer value from 0 to 255. The user can specify

the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of an

individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route

with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding

database. By specifying the preference of a static route, the user

controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes

from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a

static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the

same destination.

Metric Administrative cost of the path to the destination. If no value is entered,

default is 1. The range is 0–255.

Table 104. Route Configuration - Learned Routes (continued)

Field Description

Routing

280

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

6. Use Static to specify the static route preference value in the router.

The default value is 1. The range is 1 to 255.

7. Specify the RIP route preference value in the router.

The default value is 120. The range is 1 to 255.

8. Specify the OSPF Intra route preference value in the router.

The default value is 110. The range is 1 to 255. The OSPF specification (RFC 2328)

requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned through OSPF in the

following order: intra < inter < type-1 < type-2.

9. Specify the OSPF Inter route preference value in the router.

The default value is 110. The range is 1 to 255. The OSPF specification (RFC 2328)

requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned through OSPF in the

following order: intra < inter < type-1 < type-2.

10. Specify the OSPF External route preference value in the router.

The default value is 110. The range is 1 to 255. The OSPF specification (RFC 2328)

requires that preference value must be the same for all the OSPF external route types,

such as type1/type2/nssa1/nssa2.

11. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The Local field displays the local route preference value.

Routing

281

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure the Routing IP Settings

You can configure routing IP settings for the switch, as opposed to the IP settings for an

interface.

 To configure the routing IP settings:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IP > Basic > IP Configuration.

6. Use Routing Mode to select Enable or Disable.

You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the

interfaces. The default value is Disable.

7. Use ICMP Echo Replies to select Enable or Disable.

If you select Enable, then only the router can send ECHO replies. By default ICMP Echo

Replies are sent for echo requests.

8. Use ICMP Redirects to select Enable or Disable.

If this is enabled globally and on an interface level, then only the router can send ICMP

Redirects.

9. Use ICMP Rate Limit Interval to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number

of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.

Routing

282

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

By default, the rate limit is 100 packets/sec (the burst interval is 1000 msec). To disable

ICMP Rate limiting, set this field to 0. The valid rate Interval is from 0 to 2147483647.

10. Use ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the

number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.

By default, burst size is 100 packets. When the burst interval is 0, then configuring this

field is not a valid operation. The valid burst size range is 1 to 200.

11. Use Select to configure Global Default Gateway to edit the Global Default Gateway field.

12. Use Global Default Gateway to set the global default gateway to the manually configured

value. A default gateway configured with this command is more preferred than a default

gateway learned from a DHCP server. Only one default gateway can be configured. If you

invoke this command multiple times, each command replaces the previous value.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

View Statistics

The statistics reported on this page are as specified in RFC 1213.

 To view statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

Table 105. Routing IP Configuration

Field Description

Default Time to Live The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header

of datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by

the transport layer protocol.

Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. This is a

compile-time constant.

Maximum Routes The maximum number of routes (routing table size) supported by the

switch. This is a compile-time constant.

Routing

283

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

5. Select Routing> IP > Basic > Statistics.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 106. IP Basic Statistics

Field Description

IpInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including

those received in error.

IpInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP

headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other

format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing

their IP options, and so on.

IpInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in

their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be

received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for

example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported classes (Class E). For

entities that are not IP gateways and therefore do not forward

datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the

destination address was not a local address.

Routing

284

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

IpForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final

IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route

to forward them to that final destination. In entities that do not act as IP

gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were

source-routed through this entity, and the source-route option

processing was successful.

IpInUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

IpInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were

encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were

discarded (for lack of buffer space). This counter does not include any

datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

IpInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user

protocols (including ICMP).

IpOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does

not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.

IpOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was

encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but that

were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter

would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such

packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

IpOutNoRoutes The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be

found to transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any

packets counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion.

This includes any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its

default gateways are down.

IpReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds for which received fragments are

held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.

IpReasmReqds The number of IP fragments received that were reassembled at this

entity.

IpReasmOKs The number of IP datagrams successfully re-assembled.

IpReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IP re-assembly algorithm (for

whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily

a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track

of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received.

IpFragOKs The number of IP datagrams that were fragmented at this entity.

IpFragFails The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed

to be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for reasons such as

their Don't Fragment flag was set.

IpFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result

of fragmentation at this entity.

Table 106. IP Basic Statistics (continued)

Field Description

Routing

285

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

IpRoutingDiscards The number of routing entries that were discarded even though they

were valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be

to free up buffer space for other routing entries.

IcmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This

counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.

IcmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined

as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and

so on).

IcmpInDestUnreachs The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages received.

IcmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP time exceeded messages received.

IcmpInParmProbs The number of ICMP parameter problem messages received.

IcmpInSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP source quench messages received.

IcmpInRedirects The number of ICMP redirect messages received.

IcmpInEchos The number of ICMP echo (request) messages received.

IcmpInEchoReps The number of ICMP echo reply messages received.

IcmpInTimestamps The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages received.

IcmpInTimestampReps The number of ICMP rimestamp reply messages received.

IcmpInAddrMasks The number of ICMP address mask request messages received.

IcmpInAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP address mask reply messages received.

IcmpOutMsgs The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send.

This counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.

IcmpOutErrors The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send due to

problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value

does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the

inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations

there might be no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.

IcmpOutDestUnreachs The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages sent.

IcmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP time exceeded messages sent.

IcmpOutParmProbs The number of ICMP parameter problem messages sent.

IcmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP source quench messages sent.

IcmpOutRedirects The number of ICMP redirect messages sent. For a host, this is always

zero, since hosts do not send redirects.

IcmpOutEchos The number of ICMP echo (request) messages sent.

IcmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP echo reply messages sent.

Table 106. IP Basic Statistics (continued)

Field Description

Routing

286

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

Configure Routing Parameters for the Switch

You can configure routing parameters for the switch as opposed to an interface.

 To configure routing parameters for the switch:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IP > Advanced > IP Configuration.

6. Use Routing Mode to select Enable or Disable.

You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the interfaces.

The default value is Disable.

7. Use ICMP Echo Replies to select Enable or Disable.

IcmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages.

IcmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages sent.

IcmpOutAddrMasks The number of ICMP address mask request messages sent.

Table 106. IP Basic Statistics (continued)

Field Description

Routing

287

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

If you select Enable, then only the router can send ECHO replies. By default ICMP echo

replies are sent for echo requests.

8. Use ICMP Redirects to select Enable or Disable.

If it is enabled globally and on interface level then only the router can send ICMP

redirects.

9. Use ICMP Rate Limit Interval to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number

of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.

By default, the rate limit is 100 packets/sec, (the burst interval is 1000 msec). To disable

ICMP Ratelimiting set this field to 0. The valid rate interval is in the range 0 to

2147483647.

10. Use ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the

number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.

By default, the burst size is 100 packets. When the burst interval is 0, then configuring

this field is not a valid operation. The valid burst size is 1 to 200.

11. Use Select to Configure Global Default Gateway to edit the Global Default Gateway field.

12. Use Global Default Gateway to set the global default gateway to the manually configured

value.

A default gateway configured with this command is more preferred than a default

gateway learned from a DHCP server. Only one default gateway can be configured. If you

invoke this command multiple times, each command replaces the previous value.

13. Click the Apply button.

The updated configuration is sent to the switch. Configuration changes take effect

immediately.

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 107. Routing IP Configuration

Field Description

Default Time to Live The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header

of datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by

the transport layer protocol.

Maximum Next Hops The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. This is a

compile-time constant.

Maximum Routes The maximum number of routes (routing table size) supported by the

switch. This is a compile-time constant.

Maximum Static Routes The maximum number of static routes supported by the switch.

Routing

288

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

View IP Statistics

The statistics reported on this page are as specified in RFC 1213.

 To view IP statistics:

1. Launch a web browser.

2. Enter http://<ipaddress> in the web browser address field.

The login window opens.

3. Enter the user name and password.

The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is,

do not enter a password.

4. Click the Login button.

The System Information page displays.

5. Select Routing> IP > Advanced > Statistics.

Routing

289

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.

Table 108. IP Statistics

Field Description

IpInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including

those received in error.

IpInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP

headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other

format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing

their IP options, and so on

IpInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in

their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be

received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for

example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported classes (such as.,

Class E). For entities that are not IP gateways and therefore do not

forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded

because the destination address was not a local address.

IpForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final

IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route

to forward them to that final destination. In entities that do not act as IP

gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were

source-routed through this entity, and the source-route option

processing was successful.

IpInUnknownProtos The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but

discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

IpInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were

encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were

discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does

not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

IpInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP

user-protocols (including ICMP).

IpOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user-protocols (including

ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does

not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.

IpOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was

encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but that

were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter

would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such

packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

IpOutNoRoutes The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be

found to transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any

packets counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion.

This includes any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its

default gateways are down.

IpReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds for which received fragments are

held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.

Routing

290

M4200 and M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Web Management User Manual

IpReasmReqds The number of IP fragments received that needed to be reassembled at

this entity.

IpReasmOKs The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.

IpReasmFails The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for

whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc). This is not necessarily a count

of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the

number of fragments by combining them as they are received.

IpFragOKs The number of IP datagrams that were fragmented at this entity.

IpFragFails The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed

to be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for example this can

occur because their Don't Fragment flag was set.

IpFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result

of fragmentation at this entity.

IpRoutingDiscards The number of routing entries that were discarded even though they

are valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to

free up buffer space for other routing entries.